JP6959822B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As a pachinko gaming machine configured to be configurable to any of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player, and to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set set values. For example, there is one described in Patent Document 1.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 , there is a possibility that the work of changing the set value may be hindered.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in changing a set value.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information,
And setting means capable of setting a set value,
And game control means capable of controlling the pre-Symbol advantageous state in accordance with a set value,
Based on the second operation different from the first operation and the first operation relates to initializing the gaming machine when the power supply is started is detected, the setting permission state for permitting setting of the set value is controllable, power supply based on the fact that the said first operation is not detected the second operation when initiated was detected, control the setting confirmation state to verify the set value and set Josei your means possible,
Initialization notification means that performs initialization notification based on the initialization of the gaming machine, and
A permission notification means capable of executing a setting permission notification for notifying that the setting permission state is in the setting permission state, and a permission notification means.
A confirmation notification means capable of executing a setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation state is in the setting confirmation state, and a confirmation notification means.
It is provided with an abnormality notification means capable of executing an abnormality notification based on the occurrence of an abnormality related to a magnet.
While the information including the hold information is initialized corresponding to the setting permission state, the information including the hold information is not initialized corresponding to the setting confirmation state .
The initialization notification means
If the first operation is detected and the second operation is not detected when the power supply is started, the initialization notification is executed.
When controlled to the setting permission state, the initialization notification is executed at a timing different from the start timing of the power supply, and the initialization notification is executed.
When an abnormality related to the magnet occurs during the execution of the setting permission notification or the setting confirmation notification, the setting permission notification or the setting confirmation notification is prioritized over the abnormality notification.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an obstacle in the work of changing the set value.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effect, and
In the plurality of types of the suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be feasible in a common manner (for example, FIG. 9C).
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
At a plurality of execution timings during the execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state.
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is notified.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestion effect. It is possible
In the second suggestion effect, the title notification means may notify the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestion effect is executed than when the second suggestion effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
The suggestion effect execution means may enable the suggestion effect to be executed in an effect mode related to the title notified in the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
Detection means (for example, stick controller 31A or push button 31B) capable of detecting the movement of the player, and
A specific display execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) for performing a specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means is further provided.
The specific display execution means is
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. It is possible and
During the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIGS. 17 (E) and 18 (I)).
During the valid period of detection by the detection means, the operation effect using the second specific display after the change may be executed (for example, FIGS. 18 (J) and 18 (K)).
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
As a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, the first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (display by the first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 19A). Etc.) and a second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (second size reach title image 31AK062 or the like displayed at the time of the reach title production shown in FIG. 19D) (for example, production). A display device 5 and a CPU 120 for effect control) are further provided.
The display means
Multiple types of elements having different aspects (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc. shown in FIGS. 19 (a) and 19 (d)) It is possible to display a specific image (such as the fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) composed of the above.
When either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display is displayed in the pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (Display so that elements E1 to E5 are included in any of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D).
According to such a configuration, a specific image can be preferably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a specific image has been displayed.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern and the type of reach. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like concerning other feature parts. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine which concerns on other feature parts. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the effect control command which concerns on other feature parts. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value which becomes the random number for a game which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern which concerns on other characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table which concerns on other feature parts. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit type determination table which concerns on other characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type which concerns on other characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table which concerns on other characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table which concerns on other characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the game control data holding area which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the arrangement and display contents of the display monitor which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the storage area which stores the number of prize balls related to other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the memory map which concerns on other feature part. It is a figure which shows the built-in RAM area which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the control example of the display in the display monitor which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the buffer update which concerns on other feature parts. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main processing which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the modification which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the modification which concerns on other feature parts. It is a rear perspective view which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification which concerns on other feature parts. It is a rear perspective view which shows the state which opened the frame for a game machine in the modified example which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the state control example which concerns on the other characteristic part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing which concerns on other feature parts. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power-on which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the priority of the production control which concerns on other feature parts. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control timer interrupt processing which concerns on a feature part 80AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the progress setting confirmation processing which concerns on a feature part 80AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing which concerns on a feature part 80AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting confirmation processing during change which concerns on a feature part 80AK. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the notification which concerns on a feature part 80AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing in the feature part 81AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the specific notification processing which concerns on a feature part 81AK. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the initial operation which concerns on a feature part 83AK. It is a figure which shows the control pattern which concerns on the characteristic part 83AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power-on which concerns on a feature part 83AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the error determination processing which concerns on a feature part 83AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. An ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (although the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). If the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the recovery from the power failure has been performed or the recovery from the power failure is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the look-ahead judgment, etc. is made to the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the jackpot game state is to be terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode and the display result is “loss”. , The variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and the display result is "loss". The variation pattern of reach loss is PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and the display result is "big hit". PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8 (B). Normal reach <Super reach E <Super reach D <Super reach C <Super reach B <The order is higher in the order of Super Reach A. In addition, a reach that is determined to be a big hit may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach is performed via the normal reach. In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach, a development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 8A and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In addition, although FIG. 8A shows a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops to a super reach one step higher, a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops by two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8B, the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, Super Reach E, which has the lowest reliability among Super Reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and other Super Reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the title notification is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively fueled, and the effect of the effect is improved. The mode of notification of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be different depending on the actual display result and the like. In addition, the font (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typeface (Semi-cursive, regular script, etc.) of the title characters may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach production, the production content of the reach production, and the like.

(Example of production operation of feature section 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing the effect control process process based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. 9 and 10 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9A shows that the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. .. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 9B, the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” stop, and the reach mode is established. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect (also referred to as the super reach effect), the entire screen of the image display device 5 is as shown in FIG. 9 (D). The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character "SP Reach A") is displayed, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. , The title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9 (E), the enemy character character 31AK003 is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 confront each other. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and in the battle production, if the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character loses, it becomes a loss.

When displaying the dialogue on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the sound corresponding to the dialogue may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed in subtitles at the lower part of the image display device 5.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B (here) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9 (F). Then, the characters "SP reach B") are displayed, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of super reach B is notified. NS. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9 (G), the character 31AK006, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 confront each other. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction portion of the super reach effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

In addition, the titles of Super Reach A (Fig. 9 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (Fig. 9 (C) → (F) → (G) ...) In the introduction part until the notification, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which super reach will be achieved after the super reach production is started and which title will be notified. Super Reach A and Super Reach B are not limited to completely sharing the production mode until the title is notified, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by paying close attention to the production. The parts may be made to have a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an enemy character or suggesting an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to identify which super reach will be achieved.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 9H, the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the title of Super Reach D is notified by outputting the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "defeat the enemy") from the speaker 8. In this way, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the Super Reach effect. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. Expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 9 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation that is a big hit, but it does not have to completely match the reliability of the big hit of the reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification becomes various and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach production. Although FIG. 9 (I) shows the same effect contents as those in FIG. 9 (C) (Super Reach A, Super Reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to Super Reach D may be executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 9 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is executed. NS.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 10A, the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the characters “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to displaying the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed. In this way, in Super Reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach production of Super Reach E, which has low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation by notifying the title without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 9 (D), (F), (FIGS. 9), (F), and (2). H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, even in the super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach having high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped to notify the title.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production is performed. The title is notified at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has passed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach having low jackpot reliability are notified. In E, the title was notified at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low jackpot reliability, super The title may be notified after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area) of. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification becomes possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display areas for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, and the display areas for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of reach with low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is different according to the reach effect, the display area may be different or the display place may be different as in this embodiment.

(Expectation suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed, and Super Reach D having a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach A and Super Reach B is displayed. In the title notification in, the expectation degree suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the sense of expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed in at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

As shown in FIG. 9H and the like, the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, and the expectation degree may be suggested by a meter or a gauge, and corresponds to the expectation degree. The numerical value may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9H or the like, when the number of black stars is used, half of the black stars may be displayed so that the number of steps of the degree of expectation may be increased.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until the determined effect described later is executed. As a result, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. Further, by doing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in order to improve the effect of the effect.

Although the production operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted here, for example, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when the timing for deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display) is reached, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed. The deciding effect includes a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "missing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, a determination effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is "big hit", the image 31AK013 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 10 (C), and the big hit combination is displayed as shown in FIG. 10 (D). A fixed decorative pattern is derived. If the display result is "missing", an image showing that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative pattern that is a reach loss combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified even during the reach production, the notification of the title is terminated before the determined production is executed. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the determined production, and it is possible to execute a sharp title notification.

In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to execute the variable display. The method of displaying the decorative pattern of is arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach effect.

When the image display device 5 displays the hold display, the active display, the character that is residently displayed during the variable display, and the display related to mobile interlocking, it is appropriately hidden during the reach effect of the super reach in order to pay attention to the reach effect. May be. At that time, these displays may be left displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as Super Reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected by the low-reliability reach production, and it is possible to draw attention to the reach production in the high-reliability reach production.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. 11 (B) shows. As shown, the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. When developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 11D, the title of Super Reach B is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 11, when the reach of the development destination is the reach of performing the title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (display as if it has failed) is displayed. You may do so. By making such an effect, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gase, such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion production)
In the production operation example shown in FIG. 9 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 was designed to display the black star indicating the expectation degree from the beginning, but five white stars are displayed first and gradually. It is also possible to execute the expectation suggestion effect that suggests the expectation by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12A, when notifying the title of Super Reach D, the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is displayed first. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12C, the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK0221. The production is performed so that it fits in one of the white stars. At this time, a voice "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 12 (D) and 12 (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation suggestion display 31AK021, the black stars are highlighted as shown in FIG. 12 (F). By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion effect has been completed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation degree suggestion display is increased by one step, but two or more black stars are displayed. It may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be raised by two or more steps. Also, a half black star may be displayed to raise the degree of expectation by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of displayed stars (the number of steps of the rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three and a half black stars are displayed. In addition, audio may not be output in some cases. By doing so, the expectation suggestion effect becomes various and the effect is improved. In addition, regardless of the number of stages of expectation that increases at one time, the same image of the black star is displayed, it fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of stages of expectation that increases. You may try to perform such an effect.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In the different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command for designating a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, the effect based on the command is executed in a different effect mode. In each effect mode, the background, characters, motifs, sounds output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changed by the operation of the player.

12 (G) to 12 (L) are examples of the effect operation of the title notification and the expectation suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 12 (G). At this time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but the sound different from the normal mode (for example, the sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024 in Super Reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

After that, as shown in FIG. 12 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK024. The production is performed so that it fits in one of the white rhombuses. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice "pon" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12 (J) and 12 (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted as shown in FIG. 12 (L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect of the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

FIG. 12 shows an example of the effect operation when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). (Including) may be made different. Depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the reach title and the execution rate of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the player's preference, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation degree suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that gradually reduces the number of indications suggesting. Such an expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation degree suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect for gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display showing the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 13 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, a button is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 13 (B). The development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when the operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 13C, the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the character "SP reach C") is displayed, so that the super reach C is displayed. The title of reach C is notified. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to a title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 14 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is notified. After that, as shown in FIG. 14B, the title notice that the display color of the title 31AK030 changes to red is executed. In this way, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 14, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

Further, when the title notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound may be output according to the display mode after the change in the title display mode. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change.

(Execution timing of title notification)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) that is controlled to the jackpot advantageous state and the expectation level is improved, such as the advance notice effect and the development effect. By doing so, once the title is notified, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode. The advance notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. 7. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the superreach (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “missing”. As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the title of Super Reach changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and from "black" to "fruit pattern". Things that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing of the change in the display color of the title. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be the "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the display area of the title may be the "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as a "fruit pattern" from the beginning. For those whose display color changes, as shown in FIG. 14, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the change timing may be determined as one of them. Then, in the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than the number of super reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16 (A) in the normal mode, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. 16 (B) is used in the special mode. Determine the title display color at different rates. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the display mode of the character's lines (for example, the display color of the lines) in the reach effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character's dialogue (whether or not the dialogue notice is executed) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16C, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “missing”. As shown in FIG. 16C, the display colors of the lines in the reach production are provided to change from "white", "red", and "white" to "red", and in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. If the display color changes, the display color may change after the dialogue is displayed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes.

In addition, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the timing of each change between the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a ratio different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

In addition, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), whether or not to execute the other advance notice effect and the effect mode are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect determination process is completed.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but the title notice is given in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the unreliable super reach). And at least one of the dialogue notices may be executable. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16, but the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the determination ratio may be different depending on the type of super reach. By doing so, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of executable production modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the production becomes diverse and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of feasible production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of feasible production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a unified notice effect, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect mode of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect that the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (action effect image, etc.) of the action effect may be the same regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title and the dialogue does not change even though the action effect is executed. When executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect, or may be different from the title notice. The ratio of the dialogue notice and which production mode changes (the ratio of acting on which) may be different, or the ratio of changing to what color (how many stages) may be different. .. By executing such an action effect, the player will eventually pay attention to whether the action effect image is displayed, the title or the dialogue, and the effect effect will be improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect and the effect mode may be determined at different ratios depending on the effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute the action effect according to the effect mode, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one of the title and the dialogue is produced (display color) according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May change. By doing so, the player pays attention to the production content of the reach production.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, all of the feature portions described in the above embodiment are not essential configurations and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub-display device different from the image display device 5, a sub-liquid crystal display may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although expressed as a sub liquid crystal display here, the sub display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed in the vicinity of the image display device 5, for example, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed even after the title is notified as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above embodiment, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after notifying the title on the image display device 5, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. By doing so, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display can be displayed without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation degree suggestion display can be easily understood.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (mainly the notification for displaying characters) related to other effects. You may. For example, as a advance notice effect (for example, a look-ahead advance notice effect), when a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) in which the background image and the effect mode are different in the image display device 5 is executed, the shifted zone is executed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. When presenting a mission ("Reach with 7", "Eliminate enemies with a stick controller", etc.) and perform a mission production that will be in an advantageous state for the player when the mission is completed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Modification example 1 of feature portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a deciding effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed, and then the display result is shown (). 10 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when the predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, since the display result is displayed according to the operation of the player, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest is improved.

17 and 18 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17 (A), after the image display device 5 is in the reach mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17 (B), the ally character 31AK041 and the enemy character 31AK042 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17 (C) to 17 (F) and 18 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

Along with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 17 (D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to the happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 changes to the large button image 31AK047. Changes to.

After that, as shown in FIG. 18 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. In addition, the operation effect image may change without the action effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

Then, before the predetermined time from which the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 18 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 18 (K). , A display prompting the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A becomes an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, the image 31AK052 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 18 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 18 (M), a definite decorative symbol to be a jackpot combination is derived. If the operation is not detected within the predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 18 (L) is automatically displayed.

In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and when an operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability of is high. Even if an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to an operation effect image with high reliability during the reach effect, so that the effect is improved and the player's expectation is increased. Can be maintained.

Although the reach title notification and the expectation suggestion display are omitted in the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, they are appropriately performed in parallel with the reach effect and operation effect shown in FIGS. 17 and 18. It may be executed. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (presence / absence of operation effect, display of operation effect image, presence / absence of action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG.

(Modification example 2 of feature portion 31AK)
A suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state may be performed. For example, the shutter effect of performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect of performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title production, after the reach, the production of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach production is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include each element E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the reliability of the jackpot when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title in red letters). Then, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

When the shutter display and the reach title are displayed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 notifies the speaker 8 to output a common sound (melody), and the game effect lamp 9 emits the light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 19 is a display screen view when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 19B, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 19 (c).

Then, as shown in FIG. 19D, the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed small, for example, in the upper right corner of the screen, and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. The reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as the reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of emitting a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability such as "hot" is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title production, by outputting a specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the output periods of the common sound and the specific sound are completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 19E is executed. Enemy characters are displayed on the left side of the screen, and ally characters are displayed on the right side of the screen. When a friendly character wins a battle with an enemy character, the characters "Battle win!" Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is notified that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is completed, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number pattern. As shown in FIG. 19 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 include all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image and are displayed. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence / absence of shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 15 together with the determination related to the shutter effect.

(Explanation of configuration for other feature parts)
Next, other feature parts in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. This feature unit makes it possible to control an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the set value, and makes it possible to change the set value based on a predetermined setting change operation. It is equipped with a configuration that allows the set values to be confirmed by display. Then, the set value can be displayed by the configuration that can display the information on the game value such as the prize ball given based on the entry of the game medium such as the game ball into the predetermined area.

FIG. 20-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to this feature portion. The same reference numerals are given to the configurations common to the above-described embodiments. For example, the output circuit 111 may have the same configuration as the solenoid circuit 111. The first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B may have the same configuration as the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The effect display device 5 may have the same configuration as the image display device 5. When the display result is "missing" (hiragana), it is the same as when the display result is "missing" (katakana). The first general winning opening switch 26A, the second general winning opening switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 26D are game balls that have passed (entered) any one of a plurality of general winning openings 10. Is detected, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection.

The effect control board 12 is connected to the operation motors AK011 to AK014 for driving the movable member serving as the movable accessory (movable effect device) and the origin sensors AK021 to AK024 for detecting the origin position of the movable member. .. The operating motors AK011 to AK014 may be those using a motor, an electromagnetic solenoid, or the like. The origin sensors AK022 to AK024 may be configured by using a contact type sensor such as a micro switch or a non-contact type sensor such as a photo sensor or a capacitance type sensor. The effect control board 12 is provided with a real-time clock (RTC) 126 capable of outputting time information.

In this embodiment, when the small hit game state is controlled, the second large winning opening provided separately from the first large winning opening, which is the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, is It becomes an open state in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the second large winning opening is opened during the period until the predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. Make it a state. In the present embodiment, the second big winning opening is set to open once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses in the small hit game state, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be opened a plurality of times in the small hit game state. The 2nd prize opening is opened by the 2nd prize door when the solenoid 83 for the 2nd prize door is on, and the game ball passes (enters) the 2nd prize door. It will be easier. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 for the 2nd big prize opening door is off, the 2nd big winning opening is closed by the 2nd big winning opening, and the game ball passes through the 2nd big winning opening ( Entry) is disabled. In this way, the second major winning opening changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the second prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state is provided in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) the second prize opening. You may.

The count switch 23 is a first count switch that detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the first winning opening. The game ball that passes (enters) the second prize-winning opening is detected by the second count switch by passing through the second count switch installed in the second prize-winning opening. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second count switch, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the second major winning opening that has been opened, the game ball passes (enters) other normal winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. ) More prize balls will be paid out. Therefore, when the second big winning opening is opened, the game ball can enter the second big winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the second prize opening is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to pass (enter) the game ball through the second prize opening to obtain the prize ball, which is disadvantageous to the player. There are two states.

Inside the second prize opening, a third count switch and a fourth count switch through which a game ball can pass are installed. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second special winning opening passes through either the third count switch or the fourth count switch and is guided to the back side of the game board 2. The game ball is detected by the third count switch by passing through the third count switch. The game ball is detected by the 4th count switch by passing through the 4th count switch.

In this embodiment, the game state after the end of the small hit game is controlled to the big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the third count switch during the small hit game. Therefore, during the period when the second big winning door is open during the small hit game, if the course of the game ball is changed by adding vibration or the like and the game ball is detected by the third count switch, Since fraud that is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player becomes possible, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is designed to stop the game in such a case.

Inside the second prize opening, a regulating member that regulates and allows the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch is provided. The regulating member is provided so as to be able to change between a regulated state that regulates the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch and a permissible state that allows the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch. Has been done.

In the small hit game state, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening passes through the third count switch, it becomes a "big hit" based on the passage of the third count switch of the game ball (V winning big hit). That is, the CPU 103 controls the game state to the big hit game state based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the third count switch. On the other hand, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening in the small hit game state passes through the fourth count switch, it does not become a "big hit". That is, the CPU 103 does not control the game state to the jackpot game state based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the fourth count switch.

Then, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch of the game ball, the period until the predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or the predetermined number (for example, 29 seconds) of the second big winning opening door. For example, the second major winning opening is opened during the period until 10) winning balls are generated. As a result, a round game is executed in which the second major winning opening is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player. In the present embodiment, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch, the second big winning opening is controlled to the first state. The first winning opening may be controlled to the first state without limitation.

The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second major winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "15" or "5"). Even before the number of times the round game is executed reaches the upper limit, the round game may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball did not win the second prize opening). good.

FIG. 20-2 is a rear view showing a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a power supply board 17, and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 201. The main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 29 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 29 also has a function of displaying various winning information related to winning. A display changeover switch 30 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 29, and the information displayed on the display monitor 29 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 30.

The main board 11 has a door opening sensor 90 that detects the opening of the glass door frame that covers the front surface of the game board 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a large winning opening for detecting the opening of the first and second large winning openings. Various sensors such as the door sensor 91 are connected, and it also has a function of determining the occurrence of various abnormalities (errors) based on the detection signals output from these sensors. The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The main substrate 11 is enclosed in a substrate case 201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, a display monitor 29 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged in the center of the main substrate 11, and a display monitor 29 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 29. The display changeover switch 30 is arranged. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) has each winning opening (first winning opening, second major winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, general winning opening, hereinafter, "entrance area". The number of game balls entering the game is totaled, and various winning information such as the ratio and the winning ratio are displayed on the display monitor 29, and these winning information are displayed. As a result, various winning information such as the ratio and the role ratio after installation in the amusement park can be confirmed. On the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passing the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed (verified) whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, whether or not adjustments have been made, what kind of adjustments have been made, and as a result of the adjustments, the game balls enter the general winning opening as often as designed. It is confirmed (verified) whether it is. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize the presence / absence and contents of adjustment after installation.

The power supply board 17 is configured so that power from an AC power supply (AC100V), which is an external power supply (commercial power supply), can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. ing. The power supply board 17 is enclosed in a board case 202 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a lock switch 51 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state is set on the upper right side of the back surface of the power supply board 17. A setting changeover switch 52 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) in the changed state is provided. Further, the power supply board 17 is provided with a clear switch AK001 and a power supply switch AK002.

The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the staff in possession can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 51 requires key operation, only the staff who has the key to operate the lock switch 51 can operate the lock switch 51 among the staff in the game hall. The lock switch 51 is a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, and is also a switch capable of performing an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation).

When the power-on operation using the power switch AK002 is performed, a predetermined operation using the lock switch 51 or the clear switch AK001 such as an on / off switching operation of the lock switch 51 and a pressing operation of the clear switch AK001 is performed. May be called. The lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 may perform a predetermined operation using these switches at the same time as the power is turned on by using the power switch AK002. Therefore, at least, the lock switch 51, the clear switch AK001, and the power switch AK002 may be arranged at positions that can be simultaneously operated by a staff member of the amusement park or the like. In this way, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 can detect various operations such as on / off switching operation and pressing operation by the staff of the amusement park or the like as the power is turned on by using the power switch AK002. It is configured in.

At the lower part on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, a nozzle (discharge port) for discharging the game ball that has won a prize in each winning port or the game ball that has entered the out port to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 is provided, and the inside of the nozzle is provided. Is provided with a discharge port switch 70 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a launched game ball). The signal from the outlet switch 70 is taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11.

FIG. 20-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that this command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

The command 8001H is a first fluctuation start command for designating the fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A. The command 8002H is a second fluctuation start command for designating the fluctuation start in the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variablely displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or an effect symbol. In the variable display result notification command, when the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit" (predetermined result), or when the variable display result is "big hit". Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (decision result of the jackpot type) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used.

The variation display result notification command includes, for example, commands 8C00H to 8C05H. The command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variation display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variation display result is "small hit A". The command 8C05H is a sixth variation display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variation display result is "small hit B".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5. The command 9000H is a RAM clear notification command that notifies that the stored contents of the RAM 102 have been cleared due to the initialization by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power supply by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. Is. The command 9100H is a setting change start command that specifies the start of the setting change state that enables the setting value to be changed when the power supply by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command that specifies the execution of the power failure recovery process corresponding to the power failure recovery. Command 93XXH is a setting change end command that specifies the end of the setting change state.

In the setting change end command, for example, EXT data corresponding to the setting value newly set by the change may be set. In this case, different EXT data is set according to the setting value newly set by the change in the setting change state or the setting value continuously set without being changed. When the set value consists of three stages from 1 to 3, the command 9300H specifies that the set value is set to "1", and the command 9301H specifies that the set value is set to "2". Then, the command 9302H may specify that the set value is set to "3". According to this, the number of commands can be reduced and the capacity on the main board 11 side can be reduced. Alternatively, as the setting change end command, only the command 9300H whose EXT data is 00H is prepared, and the end of the setting change state may be specified by the command 9300H regardless of the setting value newly set by the change. Alternatively, as an effect control command different from the setting change end command, a setting value specification command for specifying the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be prepared. According to this, the transmission timing can be freely designed by not using it in combination with other effect control commands. The setting value specification command corresponds to the fluctuation start at each time of the special figure game, for example, with the transmission of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command, in addition to the case where the setting change end command is transmitted. May be sent. Further, a set value designation command may be transmitted as the variation display is executed a predetermined number of times, for example, every 10 variation starts in the special figure game. Instead of or in addition to these, a setting value designation command may be transmitted in association with the transmission of the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command. A setting value specification command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the customer waiting demo specification command.

The command 9400H is a setting confirmation start command that specifies the start of the setting confirmation state that enables the setting value to be confirmed when the power supply by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. Command 9401H is a setting confirmation end command that specifies the end of the setting confirmation state. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process. The command 9F00H is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating the display of the customer waiting demonstration screen (demo screen display) by displaying the effect image corresponding to the progress stop of the game in the customer waiting state.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a command designated during the opening of the large winning opening, which specifies that the large winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a command designated after opening the large winning opening that specifies the period during which the large winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variation display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. Different EXT data are set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state in the command specified while the big winning opening is open or the command specified after opening the big winning opening. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. , The first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H indicates that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. Based on this, it is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D100H is a V winning notification designation command for notifying that the third count switch is turned on by passing the game ball through the third count switch, that is, that the V winning is won. In the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may control to execute the V prize notification effect that notifies that the V prize has been won based on the reception of the V prize notification designation command. In the V winning notification effect, different effect patterns may be determined according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the determination ratios of the plurality of effect patterns may be different. In this way, the set value may be suggested depending on the effect mode of the V prize notification effect. For example, as the effect mode of the V prize notification effect, when the effect image indicating "V" is rotated and displayed, the effect mode in which the rotation direction is clockwise and the effect mode in which the rotation direction is counterclockwise are included. You may be. Alternatively, a plurality of production modes in which the display colors of the production images indicating "V" are different may be included. Then, the set value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the V prize notification designation command. As a result, when the V winning notification effect is executed, the effect mode according to the set value can be appropriately determined.

FIG. 20-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value which is a random number for a game counted on the side of the main board 11. In this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the normal figure display result determination are used. Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

In this embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each random value MR1 to MR5. May be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 20-5 shows the fluctuation pattern in this embodiment. Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss is also referred to as a non-reach fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern of reach loss is also referred to as a reach fluctuation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is "big hit" is also referred to as a big hit fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is "small hit" is also referred to as a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, a plurality of normal reach α, normal reach β, ... A variation pattern may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

In the ROM 101, for example, a display result judgment table (setting value 1), a display result judgment table (setting value 2), a display result judgment table (setting value 3), a jackpot type judgment table (for the first special symbol), and a jackpot type judgment A table (for the second special symbol), a small hit type determination table, etc. are stored.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit and a small hit changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 having the highest payout rate and increasing the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3 to lower the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the larger the value in the order of 2 or 3, the lower the advantage is stepwise.

FIG. 20-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. In the display result determination table, a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). There is, that is, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

FIG. 20-6 (A) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, the set value is ". It is set because a big hit is won with a higher probability (1/99) than in the case of "2" and "3", and a part of these judgment values is set as a judgment value corresponding to a small hit. The small hit is won with a higher probability (1/50) than when the values are "2" and "3". When the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is the same as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first. Even when the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, the jackpot has the same probability (1/99) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. Since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability (100/200) is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. ) To win a small hit.

FIG. 20-6 (B) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2. When using the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 2, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the jackpot is hit with a lower probability (1/150) than when the set value is "1". By winning and some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, there is a lower probability (1/99) of small hits than when the set value is "1". You are supposed to win. When the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 2 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is the same as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first. Even when the judgment value of is set and the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, the jackpot has the same probability (1/150) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. And half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is the target of variable display. , The small hit is won with the same probability (100/200) as when the set value is "1".

FIG. 20-6 (C) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3. When the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 3 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is If it is not set, and therefore the first special symbol is the target of variable display, it will be a big hit with a lower probability (1/200) than when the set values are "1" and "2". Wins, but does not win small hits (winning probability: 0). When the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 3 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is the same as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first. Even when the judgment value of is set and the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, the jackpot has the same probability (1/200) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. Since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. , The small hit is won with the same probability (100/200) as when the set values are "1" and "2".

The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit A to) with respect to the special symbol. Decide to make a jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Determining whether or not to make a jackpot means determining whether or not to control the jackpot game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is a jackpot symbol. It also means deciding whether or not to do it. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but stop at the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol. In this way, the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state differs depending on the set value. Therefore, if the set value is changed, 1 is set in a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player. Will be changed to another setting.

In this embodiment, in each display result determination table, the winning probabilities of the small hits when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second are all the same, but the small hits are in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. The winning probability may be low. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the winning probability of the small hit is reduced in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3, but it is the same as the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the second. In addition, the same winning probability may be used for all the set values.

In this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table to determine whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit. However, the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table are separately provided to determine whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit. Judgment is made using a common table for the case of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the case of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer, and the judgment of the small hit is made. A separate table may be used for the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first and the case where the buffer is the second.

In this embodiment, when the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, a judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is used as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit. It was not set, that is, the small hit was not won, but a part of the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit so that the small hit is won. It may be. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hit probability differs depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

In this embodiment, a total of three setting values, 1 to 3, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to is 2 or 4 or more (for example, 6). Further, the player's advantage according to the set value is not limited to the one in which the smaller the set value, the higher the advantage for the player, and the larger the set value, the higher the advantage for the player. May be good. For example, when the set value consists of 6 levels from 1 to 6, 1 has the lowest ball output rate, and the larger the value in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the ball output rate, and 6 is. It may be the one with the highest ball output rate. In this way, the larger the value, the lower the advantage for the player when 1 is set as the set value, and the highest advantage for the player when 6 is set. The advantage may be gradually increased.

FIG. 20-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table and a small hit type determination table. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. Referenced to determine. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variation display result is a small hit symbol, the small hit type is set to small hit A or small hit B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the hit type. Referenced to determine. In this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the third count switch during the small hit game of the small hit A, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type D is executed. It has become. Further, when the game ball passes through the third count switch during the small hit game of the small hit B, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type E is executed. .. These jackpots D and jackpot E are not the jackpot types determined by the random value MR2 for determining the hit type extracted at the time of starting winning, but the game ball is the first during the small hit game of either the small hit A or the small hit B. It is a jackpot type determined by whether or not it has passed the 3-count switch.

FIG. 20-7 (A) shows a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol). The jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) uses the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) to select the jackpot type. Referenced when deciding.

FIG. 20-7 (B) shows a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol). The jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) uses the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed) to select the jackpot type. Referenced when deciding.

FIG. 20-7 (C) shows a small hit type determination table. The small hit type determination table is referred to when determining the small hit type regardless of whether the game ball is a reserved memory based on which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening is won. ..

FIG. 20-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the jackpot types include jackpot A and jackpot D in which the time saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and jackpot B, jackpot C, and jackpot E in which the time saving control is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. It is set. Of these jackpots A to E, jackpot C and jackpot E are considered to be the most advantageous jackpots for the player, and jackpots A and jackpot D are considered to be the most disadvantageous jackpots for the player. Further, since the big hit E is a big hit that is more advantageous than the big hit D, the small hit B is a small hit that is more advantageous than the small hit A.

Of these jackpots A to jackpot E, jackpot A is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed five rounds (so-called five rounds) that change the first jackpot into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, the time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit A. The jackpot B is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) that change the first jackpot into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit B, the time saving control is executed until the special figure game is executed 20 times or until the big hit occurs again by the time when the special figure game is executed 20 times. The jackpot C is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) that change the first jackpot into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit C, the time saving control is executed until the special figure game is executed 100 times or until the big hit occurs again by the time when the special figure game is executed 100 times. The jackpot D is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) that change the second big winning opening into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, the time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit D. The jackpot E is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 14 rounds (so-called 14 rounds) that change the second jackpot into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit E, the time saving control is executed until the special figure game is executed 100 times or until the big hit occurs again by the time when the special figure game is executed 100 times.

In the jackpot D and the jackpot E, the jackpot to be opened is the second jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot D and the jackpot E are the jackpots to be opened. , May be the first prize opening. That is, for the small hit game, the second big prize opening is opened, and for the big hit D and the big hit E based on the occurrence of the V prize during the small hit game, the first big hit game is replaced with the second big prize opening. All you have to do is open the big prize opening.

In the time-saving state, the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" increases, so that a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. For this reason, in the time saving state, a big hit may occur as a result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, or a big hit may occur when the game ball wins a V during the small hit game, so that the big hit game state is normal. It tends to occur continuously without going through the state, and it becomes a so-called continuous chan state.

In the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit B is completed, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 20 times, so that a small hit occurs during the 20 special figure games and the game ball is the first. The rate of passing through the 3-count switch (the rate at which a game ball wins a V and a big hit occurs during 20 special game games) is set to about 50%. On the other hand, in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit C and the big hit E, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 100 times, so that a small hit occurs during the 100 special figure games. , The rate at which the game ball passes through the third count switch (the rate at which the game ball wins a V and a big hit occurs during 100 special figure games) is set to almost 100%.

In this embodiment, five types of jackpots A to E are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more jackpot types may be provided, and 4 The following types may be provided.

In the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", 0 to 49 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to jackpot A, and 50 ~ 149 are assigned to jackpot B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B. 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 150 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B. 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit B or the big hit C for which the time saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game is lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. I am trying to be.

In the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", 0 to 29 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to jackpot A, and 30 ~ 99 are assigned to jackpot B, and 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 69 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 70 to 269 are assigned to the jackpot B. 270 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 199 is assigned to the jackpot A, and 200 to 269 are assigned to the jackpot B. 270 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. In this way, when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the jackpots B and C for which the time saving control is executed at the end of the jackpot game is the jackpot in the special symbol game of the first special symbol. Is higher than when the above occurs, and the set values are lowered in the order of 1, 2, and 3.

In this embodiment, when the set value is 1, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to jackpot C is the highest, then the percentage of determining jackpot B is high, and the percentage of determining jackpot A is high. The lowest (Big hit type determination ratio in set value 1: Big hit C> Big hit B> Big hit A). When the set value is 2, the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot B at the highest rate, followed by jackpot A at the highest rate, and jackpot C is determined at the lowest rate (set value). Big hit type determination ratio in 2: Big hit B> Big hit A> Big hit C). Further, when the set value is 3, the rate of determining the jackpot type as jackpot A is the highest, then the rate of determining the jackpot B is the highest, and the rate of determining the jackpot C is the lowest. (Big hit type determination ratio in set value 3: Big hit A> Big hit B> Big hit C).

Depending on the set value, there may be one or more jackpot types that have not been determined among the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types should not be determined (the determination rate is 0%), or a specific jackpot type should be 100%. Included in determining by percentage.

In the small hit type judgment table, when the set value is "1", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the small hit A, and 100 to 299 are small. It is assigned to hit B. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 149 are assigned to the small hit A, and 150 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B. There is. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 199 are assigned to the small hit A, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B. There is. In this way, when a V-winning jackpot occurs during the small hit game, the ratio of determining the jackpot E, in which the number of special figure games in which the time reduction control is executed after the jackpot game ends is 100, is 20 times. It is higher than the ratio for determining the jackpot D, and is lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3.

In this embodiment, when the set value is 1, the small hit B is determined at a higher rate than the small hit A as the small hit type, so that a V prize is generated during the small hit game. The rate at which the jackpot type is determined as the jackpot E is higher than the rate at which the jackpot type is determined as the jackpot D (the percentage of the jackpot type determined by the V prize at the set value 1: jackpot E> jackpot D). Further, when the set value is 2, the small hit A and the small hit B are determined at the same ratio as the small hit type, so that a V prize is generated during the small hit game. Based on the above, the ratio of the jackpot type determined to be the jackpot D and the proportion determined to the jackpot E are equal (the percentage of the jackpot type determined by the V prize in the set value 2: jackpot E = jackpot D). Further, when the set value is 3, the small hit A is determined at a higher rate than the small hit B as the small hit type, and the V prize is generated during the small hit game. The rate at which the jackpot type is determined as the jackpot D is higher than the rate at which the jackpot E is determined (the percentage of the jackpot type determined by the V prize at the set value 1: jackpot D> jackpot E).

As described above, in this embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot and the determination ratio of the jackpot type when a V prize occurs are different according to the set value. That is, the type of the small hit game state controlled according to the set value may change, and the type of the big hit game state controlled when the V prize occurs may change. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Depending on the set value, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hit A and the small hit B. That is, if the determination ratio of the small hit type differs depending on the set value, one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit. It also includes determining the type at a rate of 100%. Further, the determination ratio of the small hit type may be different depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. When the small hit type is determined at different ratios according to the variable special map, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hit A and the small hit B, depending on the variable special map. That is, in order to determine the small hit type at different ratios according to the fluctuation special chart, one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit type is determined. It also includes determining at a rate of 100%. At least one of the big hit type and the small hit type may be determined by using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result. The larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The determination ratio of the big hit type and the small hit type is not limited to different depending on the set value, and the big hit type and the small hit type may be determined by the same determination ratio for all the set values.

The game playability itself is not limited to the one that does not change regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, and the game playability may change according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the jackpot game ends based on the game ball passing through the third count switch during the jackpot game. While controlling the later gaming state to the probabilistic state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a different game property (so-called V probabilistic type) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the third count switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. When the set value set to is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the pachinko ball passes through the third count switch during high base (during time reduction control). Based on this, the game property (so-called 1-type / 2-type mixed type) that controls the jackpot gaming state may be used. Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as those set in 1 to 3, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided. When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 or 4, the third count switch is used as an effect switch (a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the third count switch). When the set value is 2 or 3, the third count switch is used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a probability change state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the third count switch). You may use it.

The ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. The variation pattern determination table is used to determine one of a plurality of types of variation patterns according to the result of prior determination. As the fluctuation pattern judgment table, it is determined in advance that the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is decided in advance that the fluctuation display result is "big hit" and the fluctuation display result is "small hit". A variation pattern determination table for jackpots used at the time of occurrence and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is "out of place" are prepared in advance.

FIG. 20-9 is an explanatory diagram showing a large hit variation pattern determination table and a small hit variation pattern determination table. The jackpot variation pattern determination table is referred to for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination when it is determined that the variation display result is the jackpot symbol. The variation pattern determination table for small hits is referred to for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern when it is determined that the variation display result is to be a small hit symbol.

FIG. 20-9 (A) shows a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot A (for jackpot A). The jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A) is referred to when the jackpot type is jackpot A. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) is from 0 to 300 in the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3. ), And 301 to 800 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 801 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). ing. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 351 to 825 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 826 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 401 to 850 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

FIG. 20-9 (B) shows a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots (for jackpot B and jackpot C). The jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) is referred to when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot is from 0 to 100 in the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 (for jackpot B and jackpot C). It is assigned to PB1-1), 101-350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). Is assigned to. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 150 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 151 to 450 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 451 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 201 to 550 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

The fluctuation pattern judgment table for jackpot (for jackpot A) and the fluctuation pattern judgment table for jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C) include the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-). 2) For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value. When the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) is higher than the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). Moreover, the set values are lowered in the order of 1, 2, and 3. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3. In this embodiment, the super reach β is easily determined when the jackpot type is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, and the super reach α is determined when the jackpot type is “big hit A”. By assigning the judgment value so that the judgment value is easily assigned, the player's expectation that the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β will be "big hit B" or "big hit C" is raised. Can be done.

FIG. 20-9 (C) shows a variation pattern determination table for small hits. In the small hit variation pattern judgment table, regardless of whether the set value is "1", "2", or "3", 0 to 997 out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 is a small hit. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PC1-1) of. In the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Has been done. Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. With the set values "1", "2", and "3", the fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios.

FIG. 20-10 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for detachment. The deviation pattern determination table is referred to for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern when it is determined that the variation display symbol is to be the detached symbol.

FIG. 20-10 (A) shows the deviation pattern determination table A for detachment. The deviation pattern determination table A is referred to when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control. In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β.

FIG. 20-10 (B) shows the deviation pattern determination table B. The deviation pattern determination table B is referred to when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the low base state. In the variation pattern determination table B for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 2 to 4 are displayed. A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-2) and the deviation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β is assigned as the determination value. There is.

FIG. 20-10 (C) shows the deviation pattern determination table C for detachment. The deviation pattern determination table C is referred to when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. In the variation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 5 to 8 are shown. A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-2) and the deviation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β is assigned as the determination value. There is.

FIG. 20-10 (D) shows the deviation pattern determination table D. The deviation pattern determination table D is referred to when the gaming state is a high base state in which the time saving control is implemented. In the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortening non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2) corresponding to the time reduction control are shown. -2), A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β.

When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that of determining the super reach variation pattern, and is lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3. It is supposed to be. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 900 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. If each variation pattern is assigned, that is, if the variation display result is out of alignment, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a common decision rate regardless of the set value, so the super reach variation pattern It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

The "common decision rate" is one in which the decision rate is completely the same with different set values (this embodiment) and one in which the decision rate is the same with different set values (for example, the set value). The determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach differs by about 1% between 1 and the set value 3). If the variation display result is out of order, it is not limited to the form in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value, and if the variation display result is out of order, Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and only the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of any of non-reach and normal reach may be the same. It may be the same. If the fluctuation display result is out of order, the set value is set so that both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach α and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β are set regardless of the set value. Regardless of the form, it is not limited to the same form, and if the variation display result is out of alignment, only one of the determination rate of the variation pattern out of Super Reach α and the determination rate of the variation pattern out of Super Reach β The determination ratio of may be the same regardless of the set value. If the fluctuation display result is out of order, the set value is set so that both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach α and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β are set regardless of the set value. Regardless of the form, it is not limited to the same form, and even when the variation display result is a jackpot, the setting value in which the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot is set regardless of the set value. It may be the same regardless of. If the variation display result is out of alignment, it is not limited to the form in which the determination rate of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach differs depending on the set value, and it is not limited to the set value. Of the reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns. If the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the variation patterns should not be determined (the determination rate is 0%), or a specific variation pattern is set to 100%. It is also included to decide with. It is not limited to the form in which the fluctuation pattern is determined using the deviation pattern determination table that differs according to the total number of reserved storages, and the number of reserved storages in the special symbol to be changed (for example, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol). The variation pattern is changed using the deviation pattern determination table, which differs according to the number of reserved memory of the first special symbol when executing, and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when executing the variation display of the second special symbol. May be determined.

In each deviation pattern determination table, regardless of the numerical value of 1 to 3 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach deviation (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is set. The range of assigned random numbers is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the fluctuation display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (super reach loss). The appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It should be noted that the variation display is not limited to a form in which the ratio of the variation display executed in the variation pattern out of super reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability for each set value are not limited. In consideration of the probability of loss, the variation display may be executed at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the variation pattern of the super reach deviation.

FIG. 20-11 shows the game control data holding area 150. The game control data holding area 150 is provided in the RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, and serves as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 150 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control timer setting unit. It includes 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A stores the hold data related to the variable display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the first starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the first starting condition by passing (entering) the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the fluctuation display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment are set as pending data. , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The first starting condition is established when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning is generated. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held without being started yet, and the variation display result in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit based on (special figure display result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 151B stores the hold data related to the variable display of the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the second starting condition by the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the fluctuation display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment are set as pending data. , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The second starting condition is established when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting winning is generated. The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure has not been started yet and is held, and the variation display result in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit based on (special figure display result).

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit 151C associates the game ball with the hold number in the order in which it has passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers. The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software. The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, and are stored as random count values according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The totalization of game balls and the display of the accessory ratio and the like on the main board 11 of this embodiment will be described. On the main board 11, information regarding the winning of the game, for example, the number of winning balls by winning the first starting winning opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the first large The number of winning balls and the total number of winning balls by winning the winning opening and the second major winning opening (attacker) are input, and the number of launched balls is totaled. The ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second major winning opening (attacker), and the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) out of the total number of prize balls The role ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls from winning the 1st and 2nd prizes (attacker), and the base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. Is to be displayed. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of consecutive winning balls below) by winning the first prize opening and the second prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the number of prize balls by winning the 2nd starting prize opening (Denchu) and the number of prize balls by winning the 1st big winning opening and the 2nd big winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls ( This is the ratio of the number of balls acquired for the following characters). The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls won below) is based on the number of prize balls by winning the 1st prize opening and the 2nd prize opening (attacker) and the winning of the 2nd starting prize opening (Denchu). The number of prize balls and the prize balls by winning the prizes (first start prize, general prize) other than the first prize, the second prize (attacker), and the second start prize (electric chew). It is the sum of numbers and. The first large winning opening, the second large winning opening (attacker), and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable accessories, and the game ball can be won by changing the passable width of the game ball. It is a character whose assumed ratio fluctuates. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the first major winning opening, the second major winning opening (attacker), and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are fixed characters, and the game The passable width of the ball is fixed, and the expected winning ratio of the game ball is a fixed value.

As for the aggregation and calculation method of the information on the winning of the game, regarding the continuous ratio and the winning combination ratio, the winning balls by winning the first starting winning opening (Heso) and the general winning opening (Sode) in the number of 6000 prize balls. Number (number of general prize balls), number of ordinary electric role prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), which is the number of prize balls by winning the second starting prize opening (electric chew), first large prize opening and second large prize The number of special electric service prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls for winning a prize in the mouth (attacker), is totaled. The total is taken as one set, and the continuous ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60,000 pieces are calculated. In addition, the number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric role prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), and the special electric power The number of prize balls (number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. ing. That is, a considerable amount (for example, several bytes) of 6000 pieces of 11 sets are stored, and the cumulative ratio (%) and combination ratio (%) of them can be calculated. As for the base, the number of game balls launched for the number of prize balls of 60,000 is totaled. The total is set as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of game balls launched is calculated.

The display monitor 29 is a base calculated based on the 6000 consecutive ratios (%), the winning combination (%), the cumulative continuous ratio (%), the winning combination (%), and the previous 60000 prize balls ( The base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls can be switched and displayed at predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display all, but the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (navel) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew), which are totaled as the game progresses, The number of prize balls by winning, the number of prize balls by winning the first prize opening and the second prize opening (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying the continuous ratio (%) of 6000 pieces is reflected in the winning ratio (%) of 60,000 pieces displayed thereafter, it is equivalent to 6000 pieces. There is a risk that there will be a discrepancy between the ream ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 60,000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (Heso), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu), the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) If the number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls due to winning are input and totaled at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, the display timing of the ratio (%) of 6000 pieces), such a discrepancy Can be prevented.

A storage area for storing information regarding the winning of the game in this embodiment is provided for each set value, and is provided for each set value, such as a general winning ball, a first starting mouth prize ball, an ordinary electric service award ball, and a special electric service award. The balls, the total prize balls, and the total hits are stored in the storage area (ring buffer) according to the set value. Therefore, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base of this embodiment can be calculated individually for each set value.

As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening (Denchu) and the first and second major winning openings (attackers) The calculation method of the bonus ratio (role ratio (%)) when the number of winning balls, which is the total number of prize balls by winning the prize, is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls means the total total number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of balls acquired as a character means the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of consecutive winning balls is the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the game medium to the attacker. The total number of hits is the cumulative number of gaming media that have been hit into the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the number of prize balls reaches 60,000. Therefore, the connection ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the combination ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2). The base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

Ream ratio = [Number of consecutive characters acquired / Total number of acquired characters] x 100 ... (1)

Role ratio = [(Number of consecutive winning balls + Number of winning balls) / Total number of acquisitions] x 100 ... (2)

Base = [60,000 (total number of prize balls) / total number of hits] x 100 ... (3)

When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of winning balls is 42,000, the prize ratio is calculated as 0.70 (rounded down to the nearest three digits) by dividing 42000 by 60,000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform the calculation after the decimal point, the calculation by the following method is required.

First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning balls is multiplied by 100 to obtain 4200000. Then, this 4200000 is divided by 60,000. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by multiplying the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be multiplied by 1000.

Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then divide 42000 by this 600. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be divided by 1000.

In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the accessory ratio for a long period of time. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA60h in the storage area of 3 bytes. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of winning balls. The microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform calculations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the operation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

A third calculation method obtained by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is rounded down from the total number of prize balls of 00EA60h so that the calculation by the microcomputer used for the pachinko game machine 1 becomes easy, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower 1-byte 10h is rounded down to the number of winning balls of 00A410h, and the number of winning balls of bonus is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation. Then, in the same manner as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, by dividing 156 by this 2, 78 is obtained as a quotient. From 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 78%. In the third calculation method, the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, if the total number of prize balls and the number of winning balls are both 10 times, the error will be + 1%. That is, the error is reduced by lengthening the period for calculating the accessory ratio, and is approximated to the original value.

In the calculation of the winning combination (%), for example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning balls is 19876, 34321 is divided as a divisor from 19876 to calculate the ratio. 1976/34321 = 0.57912 ..., And it is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When performing calculations on the game control microcomputer 100, it is necessary to avoid calculation with a decimal point, so the calculation formula is replaced with the following formula. In the division of 1976/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, the decimal point is rounded down, and 1976/343 = 57.9475 ... Since the part after the decimal point is rounded down, it is calculated that the role ratio (%) is 57%, and it is displayed on the display monitor 29. Will be missing.

The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (0 except for the value of the most significant bit), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when it is replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, which is an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point rounded down, for example, when the accurate value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display value is 69% → 70%. It is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, but even on the display of an error of 1%, the combination ratio (%) (or the connection ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error.

Further, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, so that the calculation cannot be performed when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100. Further, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. Therefore, the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) may not be displayed on the display monitor until the total number of acquired balls (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits) of a specific number or more is totaled by the counter. , Even if the display is performed, it may be notified that the error may be large by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

The storage area in which the information regarding the winning of the game is stored may be continuously stored without being initialized when the clear switch AK001 or the like is operated. This storage area may constitute a 10-set total buffer, a total number of prize balls buffer, or the like, which is a total of information on winning a game stored in a ring buffer including a ring buffer and having 10 counters having a maximum of 2 bytes. .. In addition, the check sum of the stored value is calculated, and if an abnormality is detected, it is initialized, or the value of the number of winning balls is larger than the value of the total number of stored prize balls, or the character is Initialization of the storage area where information related to winning a game is stored when an event that cannot occur in a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive winning balls is larger than the value of the number of acquired balls. Processing may be performed. Further, an error display, a warning display, or the like may be performed without performing the initialization process, an error display or a warning display may be performed, or an initialization process may be performed after the error display or the warning display is performed.

When a failure occurs in the calculation of the connection ratio or the combination ratio, or when the calculation of the connection ratio or the combination ratio has to be redone, the display monitor clear switch different from the clear switch AK001 is operated. By doing so, the data used for the connection ratio and the combination ratio stored in the non-volatile storage device such as the RAM 102 or the flash memory may be cleared. The display monitor clear switch may be arranged on the back side surface of the game board 2 at a position such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17 that cannot be easily operated by a staff member of the game hall or the like. When the display monitor clear switch is operated, a display monitor clear signal different from the clear signal is transmitted to the main board 11.

The substrate case 201 is made of a translucent material so that the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 29 can be visually recognized. The board case 201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of an electric component of the main board 11. The display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiating hole is not directly in front of the main board 11. Therefore, the heat dissipation holes do not block the visibility of the display monitor 29. In addition, the "direct front" here means a direct front with the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between a staff member or the like of a game hall who wants to visually recognize the main board 11 and the main board 11.

The display monitor 29 displays the combination ratio (%), the connection ratio (%), and the base (%) on 7 segments, and each value is switched and displayed every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). do. In this case, for example, while the combination ratio (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium is awarded to the electric chew or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is continuously compared after 5 seconds ( If it is displayed as a value of%), there is a risk that the value of the combination ratio (%) and the value of the consecutive combination (%) will deviate. Therefore, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed. When the numerical value that can be displayed in the 7-segment is double-digit (for example, when two 7-segments are provided), 100% is set as 100 and the display cannot be performed. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. The display monitor 29 can display a numerical value in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under certain conditions, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits. It should be noted that the attacker is not limited to a form in which the sensors provided in each of the attacker and the electric chew detect that the game medium has won a prize, and the number of each prize ball is individually totaled based on the detection result. The number of winning balls and the number of continuous winning balls are based on the detection result using the sensor provided after the discharge passages from which the winning game medium and the winning game medium are discharged are merged. May be aggregated.

The main board 11 is provided on the back surface side of the game board 2. On the back surface side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, each peripheral board such as the effect control board 12 is also provided. The RAM 102 in the main board 11 includes a gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth. A general prize counter and a large prize counter are provided. It should be noted that the number of winnings of the 1st big winning opening and the 2nd big winning opening (attacker) is not limited to the form of totaling by the large winning number counter, and the number of winnings to these 1st big winning opening is totaled. A counter for the number of first prizes and a counter for the number of prizes for the second prize, which totals the number of prizes for the second prize, are separately provided, and the number of prizes for the first prize and the number of prizes for the second prize are set separately. The number of winnings may be totaled individually, and the total number of each of these winnings may be used as the number of winnings to the attacker.

The gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B. The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 26A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 26B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 26C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 26D. The large prize number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23 and the second count switch 24A.

FIG. 20-12 shows the arrangement and display contents of the display monitor 29. The main board 11 is housed in the board case 201. A caulking pin 11B is attached to the board case 201. By providing the caulking pin 11B, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 201, and fraudulent acts on the main board 11 are prevented. The substrate case 201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter, also referred to as a “crimped substrate case”). The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing sticker 11S is attached to the substrate case 201 to prove that the main substrate 11 is enclosed. The sealing sticker 11S is attached across the removed portion of the substrate case 201, for example. The sealing sticker 11S is arranged at a position away from the main board 11, and is arranged at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 29 is obstructed, such as directly in front of the display monitor 29. As described above, the display monitor 29 is arranged at a position not hidden by the sealing sticker 11S.

As shown in FIG. 20-12 (A), the display monitor 29 includes a first display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, a fourth display unit 29D, and a fifth display unit 29E. .. The first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. These first display units 29A to fifth display units 29E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

As shown in FIG. 20-12 (B), each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 is displayed on the display monitor 29. The aggregated set values (1 to 3) are displayed on the first display unit 29A of the first digit, and the aggregation period is displayed on the second display unit 29B of the second digit and the third display unit 29C of the third digit. Then, the numerical value is displayed as a percentage on the 4th display unit 29D of the 4th digit and the 5th display unit 29E of the 5th digit. The display No. 1 displays the short-term continuous ratio, and the display No. 2 displays the short-term combination ratio. Display No. 3 displays the total cumulative ratio, and display No. 4 displays the total cumulative combination ratio. Further, in the display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls is displayed, and in the display No. 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls is displayed. Will be done. The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for obtaining the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset. In the above example, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the continuous ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening in the big hit game state to the total number of prize balls. May be good. Further, the base may be calculated individually for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C display "y6." "Y7." Is displayed on the display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed. "A7." Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E, and the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. When displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. "B6." Is displayed on 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display).

In calculating the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, the main board 11 has a first large winning opening, a second large winning opening (attacker), a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a first general winning opening. The number of game balls that have entered the 4th general winning opening and the number of game balls that have been discharged from the discharge port are totaled. In the main process, the CPU 103 includes a gate switch 21, a first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B, a first count switch 23, a second count switch 24A, and a first general winning opening switch 26A to a fourth general. Switch processing is performed to confirm the status (presence / absence of detection signal) of each switch of the winning port switch 26D and the discharging port switch 70. In the switch processing, it is specified which approach area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. Then, when the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passing number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the detection signal is output. The values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the large winning number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch 26A , 2nd general winning opening switch 26B, 3rd general winning opening switch 26C, 4th general winning opening switch 26D, when a detection signal is output, the 1st general winning number counter, the 2nd general winning number counter, the second The values of the 3 general winning number counter and the 4th general winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the outlet switch 70, the value of the driving number counter is added to enter each approach area. The number of game balls entering (the number of game balls winning into each winning opening) is totaled. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102. In this way, the step for totaling the number of game balls entering each approach area is executed together in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each approach area (switch state confirmation process). By including it in the switch processing), it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without executing a separate counting program, that is, without causing the problem of capacity shortage due to the increase in the number of execution programs. It has become.

FIG. 20-13 shows a storage area for storing the number of prize balls to each winning opening. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of winning balls by winning each winning opening based on the total number of winning balls to each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let me. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize for the winning opening by the number of winnings for the winning opening. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is predetermined for each winning opening. The number of prize balls for each winning opening to be classified is the general winning opening prize ball (the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening (sode) winning ball), the first starting winning opening winning ball (the first). 1 With the number of prize balls of the starting prize ball (prize ball by winning the starting prize), the ordinary electric role prize ball (the prize ball by winning the electric chew), and the special electric role prize ball (the prize ball by winning the attacker) be. The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of game balls hit. In the CPU 103, the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the number of game balls won in the first start winning opening are individually totaled, but the number of winning balls in the general winning opening and the first start are calculated individually. The number of game ball winnings to the winning opening may be aggregated. In addition, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls of the first starting winning opening prize ball are calculated separately, but the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the first starting winning opening The number of prize balls may be calculated together with the number of prize balls.

The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls and the number of shots. The ring buffer includes ten first storage areas to tenth storage areas including a counter of a maximum of 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer includes a 0th storage area including a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. The number of prize balls for each winning opening, which increases as the game progresses, is added to the 0th storage area. The 11 storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin. Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area of the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and the total cumulative total for each winning opening. There is. The total storage area for 10 sets and the total storage area are composed of a counter of up to 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60,000 data can be stored with a margin. I can remember.

The RAM 102 stores a ratio combination storage area for storing 10 sets and the total cumulative combination ratio and ratio, a base for 10 sets (base 2), and a base for the previous 10 sets (base 1). A base storage area is provided. In the CPU 103 of the main board 11, the winning ratios and consecutive ratios of 10 sets and the total cumulative total are calculated based on the number of prize balls based on the number of winning games to each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative total, and the 10 sets worth. And the total cumulative combination ratio and connection ratio are stored in the connection ratio combination storage area. The ratio-combination ratio storage area for storing the combination ratio and the combination ratio for 10 sets and the total cumulative total is composed of a counter of a maximum of 1 byte. The winning ratios and linkage ratios for 10 sets and the total cumulative total can be stored with a margin at a counter of up to 1 byte, for example, when storing them as integers. In the CPU 103 of the main board 11, the base for 10 sets is calculated based on the number of hits for the number of winnings of the game ball into each winning opening for 10 sets, and the calculated base for 10 sets (base 2) and the previous time. The base (base 1) calculated by the number of hits for the number of winnings of the game ball into each winning opening for 10 sets of the above is stored in the base storage area. When the base 1 and the base 2 are stored as integers, for example, they can be stored with a margin by a counter having a maximum of 1 byte.

FIG. 20-14 shows a memory map of the CPU 103 on the main board 11. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the built-in register, ROM 101, RAM 102, and the like. The address / data signal line of the ROM 101 is assigned to the internal ROM area which is the ROM area of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 0000H to 2FBFH; 2FC0H to 2FFFH is the program management area), and the CPU 103 is assigned to the internal ROM area. Data is read from ROM 101 by designating this ROM area. Further, in this embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H. The address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to the built-in register area (FE00H to FEBFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register or goes to the register via this built-in register area. Write the data of. The address / data signal line of the RAM 102 is assigned to the built-in RAM area which is the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 specifies this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102. Data is written to the RAM 102. The other areas of the memory space (3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH in this embodiment) are regarded as unused areas.

FIG. 20-15 shows an RWM area that serves as a built-in RAM area. The built-in RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 is composed of a RAM control area, an unused area, a RAM data area, and other areas. The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area is composed of instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operator) required for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. Data for the control program to be used (sometimes referred to simply as control program data) is temporarily stored. Reference data (for example, various lottery data) referred to by the control program is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area.

The data used for displaying the connection ratio and the combination ratio is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area or the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area is provided with a storage area for storing the total total number of prize balls for each winning opening and a continuous ratio storage area for the total total. The storage areas of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas include an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having 1st to 10th storage areas, and the number of winning balls for each winning opening (10 sets). ) Is provided, and a storage area for 10 sets is provided. Data having different starting addresses of subroutines are stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area. 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address in the built-in RAM area, and each data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data, management data) stores 1 byte. When the data exceeds the number of bytes (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. ..

FIG. 20-16 shows an example of display control on the display monitor 29. The main board 11 controls the display monitor 29 to display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. On the display monitor 29, a plurality of items are sequentially displayed.

FIG. 20-16 (A) is a time chart showing an mode of display change on the display monitor 29. When the display on the display monitor 29 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative winning combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed. The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. Then, when the display of the display No. 6 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. After that, from the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 to the base 2 of display No. 6, each display is sequentially changed and displayed every 5 seconds. As for the display color, only the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 is red. In this way, the display monitor 29 switches between the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 every 5 seconds for display.

FIG. 20-16 (B1) shows a case where the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "y" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "1." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 20-16 (B2) shows a case where the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "y" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 20-16 (B3) shows a case where the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "A" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E. For example, when the total cumulative ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 20-16 (B4) shows a case where the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "A" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 20-16 (B5) shows a case where the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "b" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "L." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "0." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 20-16 (B6) shows a case where the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "b" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

The display of the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 can be sequentially changed for each set value based on the operation of the display changeover switch 30. There is. For example, when the set value is "1" and the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed, the display changeover switch 30 is operated. As a result, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to "2", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, and total cumulative ratio displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, The display of the total cumulative winning combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 is changed to the display corresponding to the case where the set value is "2". When the set value is "2", the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed, and by operating the display changeover switch 30. The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to "3", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative total displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The display of the combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 is changed to the display corresponding to the case where the set value is "3". When the set value is "3" and the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed, the display changeover switch 30 is operated. The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to "1", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative total displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The display of the combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 is changed to the display corresponding to the case where the set value is "1".

In the display monitor 29, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in each set value are not limited to the displayable form, and only one numerical value among these connection ratios, combination ratios, and bases, or Only the numerical value of any 2 may be displayed. The connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of prize balls given, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are not limited to the form of being displayed on the display monitor 29. The history of the number of prize balls given may be displayed on the display monitor 29 without calculating the winning ratio and the base. On the display monitor 29, only the short-term continuous ratio is displayed in red, and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the base 1 and the base 2 are not limited to those displayed in green, and are not limited to the short-term consecutive ratio. The short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio and total cumulative role ratio are displayed in the same color, and base 1 and base 2 are the same as the short-term combination ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, and total cumulative role ratio. It may be displayed in color.

FIG. 20-17 shows an example of executing an update in the active buffer and the ring buffer. In the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Further, the storage area of the total sum and the total total of 10 sets and the storage area of the continuous ratio combination storage area for storing the combination ratio and the connection ratio of the 10 sets and the total total are updated, respectively. At this time, the numerical values stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer are moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, and the numerical values stored in the 1st to 9th storage areas of the ring buffer are each second. Move to the storage area to the tenth storage area. For example, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is "27", "81", "120", "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", and "45", respectively. It is "21". At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 100 millionth area to the 10th storage area is changed to "27", "81", and "120", respectively. "36" "225" "87" "66" "117" "45" "21" is updated. Along with this, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to "0", and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is erased. When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be erased once and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new number of prize balls may be stored by overwriting the stored number of prize balls.

(Explanation of game control regarding other feature parts)
FIG. 20-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 in this embodiment. It suffices if this main process can be executed in place of the game control main process. In the main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step Sa1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step Sa2), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step Sa3). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), etc.) (step Sa4), the RAM 102 can be accessed. (Step Sa5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the clear switch AK001 is ON based on the clear signal which is the output signal of the clear switch AK001 (step Sa6). If the clear switch AK001 is off, it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process has been executed (step Sa7). When the power failure detection process is executed, it is determined whether or not the execution result of the parity check is normal (step Sa8). If the check result is normal, the start address of the backup setting table is set in the pointer (step Sa41), and the initial value is set in the work area based on the contents (step Sa42). As a result, the stored contents at the time of power failure regarding the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are restored.

When the power failure is restored in step Sa42, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on based on the lock switch signal which is the output signal of the lock switch 51 (step AKS001). When the lock switch 51 is turned on in step AKS001, the set value can be confirmed by executing the setting confirmation process (step AKS002). In the setting confirmation process, it is possible to confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. After the lock switch AK002 is turned off in step AKS001 or the setting confirmation process is executed in step AKS002, the process proceeds to step Sa14. When the lock switch AK002 is turned off in step AKS001, the command 9200H, which is a power failure recovery designation command, may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 182.

When the execution of the setting confirmation process is started in step AKS002, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting confirmation is started from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The command 9400H, which is a command, is transmitted. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, and the normal The symbol display 20 may be controlled so that the missed symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stop state different from the missed symbol is performed. When the execution of the setting confirmation process in step AKS001 is completed, the setting confirmation state and the game stop state associated therewith are ended, and the command 9401H, which is a setting confirmation end command, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Will be done.

If the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6, the power failure detection process is not executed in step Sa7, or the check result is not normal in step Sa8, the predetermined RAM is cleared. The process is executed to clear the data other than the set value stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 102 (step Sa9). The storage area in which the information regarding the winning of the game is stored may not be cleared in step Sa9. Following step Sa9, the start address of the initialization setting table is set in the pointer (step Sa10), and the initial value is set in the work area based on the contents (step Sa11). As a result, the stored contents regarding the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are initialized. When the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) by steps Sa9 and Sa10. , The operation related to the initialization of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be detected.

When the stored contents are initialized in step Sa11, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on based on the lock switch signal (step Sa12). When the lock switch 51 is turned on in step Sa12, the set value can be changed by executing the setting change process (step Sa13). In the setting change process, it is possible to confirm the change status of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. After the lock switch 51 is turned off in step Sa12 or the setting change process is executed in step Sa13, the process proceeds to step Sa14.

When the lock switch 51 is turned off in step Sa12, the command 9000H, which is a RAM clear notification command, may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The setting change process is not limited to the mode in which the setting change process is executed on the condition that the lock switch 51 is on, and the setting change process is executed on the condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is open. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed.

When the execution of the setting change process is started in step Sa13, the setting change state is set as the change permission state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 Then, the command 9100H, which is a setting change start command, is transmitted. When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the execution of the setting change process in step Sa13 is completed, the setting change state and the game stop state associated therewith are ended, and the command 93XXH, which is a setting change end command, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Will be done. If the lock switch 51 is on, it is set when the clear switch AK001 is on, when the power failure inspection process is not executed, or when the execution result of the parity check is not normal. The mode is not limited to executing the change process, and the setting change process may be executed if the lock switch 51 is on only when the RAM 102 is cleared when the clear switch AK001 is on.

After that, the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is read out (step Sa14), and the set value is used as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the random number circuit 104 is initially set by the random number circuit setting process (step Sa15). In addition, a setting is made to generate a periodic timer interrupt every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step Sa16). Then, the interrupt prohibition setting (step Sa17), the display random number update process (step Sa18), the initial value random number update process (step Sa19), and the interrupt permission setting (step Sa20) are repeatedly executed.

When the special symbol normal process is executed in the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 is based on a display result determination table according to a set value and numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining a variable display result. Whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, when the fluctuation pattern setting process is executed, any of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns can be selected by using the fluctuation pattern judgment table according to the set value and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern judgment. You just have to decide. In this way, the game can be advanced so that the advantage for the player is different by determining the variable display result at different ratios according to the set value.

In this embodiment, when the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6 of the main process, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in steps Sa9 to Sa11, and then in steps Sa12 and Sa13. The set value can be changed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the stored contents of the RAM 102 may be initialized (cleared) after the state in which the set value can be changed ends. .. That is, when the clear switch AK001 is on in step Sa6, it is determined in step Sa12 whether or not the lock switch 51 is on, and if it is off, the process proceeds to steps Sa9 to Sa11, so that the RAM 102 When the stored contents are initialized (cleared) and the lock switch 51 is turned on in step Sa12, the setting change process is executed in step Sa13, and after the process is completed, steps Sa9 to You may proceed to Sa11. For example, when the RAM clear notification command is transmitted in response to the initialization (clearing) of the stored contents of the RAM 102, the initialization notification is started in accordance with the reception of the RAM clear notification command on the effect control board 12. There are times. Therefore, if steps Sa9 to Sa11 are executed before step Sa13, the initialization notification is executed and the setting is made when the setting change process is executed in step Sa13 and the set value can be changed. There is a risk that the work of changing the value will be hindered. On the other hand, after the setting change process of step Sa13 is completed, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) by steps Sa9 to Sa11, so that the initialization notification and the like are started after the change of the set value is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered. Specifically, since the initialization notification is performed after the change of the set value is completed, it is possible to prevent the troublesomeness caused by the output of the initialization notification voice during the setting change.

FIG. 20-19 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting change process of step Sa13. As shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), the power switch AK002 is operated by a staff member of the amusement park when the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, the base, etc. are displayed on the display monitor 29, and the power is supplied by shutting off the power. When stopped, the display on the display monitor 29 ends, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B). After that, when a staff member of the amusement park or the like presses the clear switch AK001 and operates the power switch AK002 while switching the lock switch 51 on, the power supply is started by turning on the power. As shown in -19 (C), the display monitor 29 displays the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 in the first display unit 29A. When the setting changeover switch 52 is pressed by a staff member of the game hall or the like while this set value is displayed, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is sequentially updated each time the operation is detected. To display. For example, when the pressing operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, if "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, it is updated to "2", and if "2" is displayed, it is changed to "3". It suffices if the display of the first display unit 29A can be sequentially and sequentially updated between "1" and "3" by updating and updating to "1" if "3" is displayed. After that, when the lock switch 51 is pushed in by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the operation is detected and the set value displayed on the first display unit 29A is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (update storage). do. At this time, by blinking the first display unit 29A, a staff member of the game hall or the like can recognize that a new set value has been stored.

When the setting change process is executed in step Sa13, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9. Therefore, when the set value is changed, the hold storage based on the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B is deleted. When a switching operation for turning off the lock switch 51 is performed by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the setting change process is terminated because the operation is detected. The CPU 103 is in a state where the game can be played by executing the processes after step Sa14 in the main process. As a result, for example, the variable display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the variable pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed. The setting change process is not limited to displaying the stored value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 29. For example, the setting value most advantageous for the player. A predetermined setting value such as "1" or "3", which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player, may be displayed.

In the setting change process, the control of sequentially updating and displaying the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29 is limited to the form of updating each time the pressing operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. For example, each time a pressing operation of the clear switch AK001 is detected, the display may be sequentially updated and displayed. For example, in the display monitor 29, when the clear switch AK001 is pressed while the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the first display unit 29A displays "1". If "" is displayed, it is updated to "2", if "2" is displayed, it is updated to "3", and if "3" is displayed, it is updated to "1". It suffices if the display of the display unit 29A can be periodically and sequentially updated between "1" and "3". In this case, the clear switch AK001 used for initializing the stored contents of the RAM 102 can be commonly used for changing the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in manufacturing cost due to an increase in the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In this embodiment, the display monitor 29 is used to display the set values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and to display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, the base, and the like. The display monitor 29 is used to display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, the base, etc., while the setting display unit different from the display monitor 29 is used to display the set value. May be good. As a result, the control for displaying the connection ratio, the combination ratio, the base, etc. using the display monitor 29 and the control for displaying the set value using the setting display unit can be clearly separated. The processing by the control program or the like can be distributed and simplified, and the control load can be reduced. In this way, when a setting display unit different from the display monitor 29 is used, the setting display unit may be arranged on a substrate different from the substrate on which the display monitor 29 is arranged, or the display monitor 29 may be arranged. The setting display unit may be arranged on a board common to the board.

FIG. 20-20 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting confirmation process of step AKS002. As shown in FIG. 20-20 (A), when the connection ratio, the combination ratio, the base, etc. are displayed on the display monitor 29, the power switch AK002 is operated by a staff member of the amusement park or the like, and the power is supplied by shutting off the power. When stopped, the display on the display monitor 29 ends, as shown in FIG. 20-20 (B). After that, the power supply is started by turning on the power by operating the power switch AK002 while switching the lock switch 51 on without pressing the clear switch AK001 by a staff member of the amusement park. As shown in 20-20 (C), on the display monitor 29, the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 29A. In the state where this set value is displayed, even if the setting changeover switch 52 is pressed by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A cannot be updated and displayed. After that, when a switching operation for turning off the lock switch 51 is performed by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the operation is detected and the setting confirmation process is terminated. The CPU 103 is in a state where the game can be played by executing the processes after step Sa14 in the main process. As a result, for example, the variable display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the variable pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed.

In this way, the display monitor 29 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can display information on the game value that enables confirmation of adjustment of the number of prize balls after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. The display monitor 29 can display information on set values for advancing the game so that the advantage for the player is different by changing the probability of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to provide a display device for displaying the set value separately from the display device for displaying the information on the game value, it is possible to prevent an increase in the manufacturing cost due to an increase in the device configuration in the pachinko gaming machine 1. can.

(Explanation of modified examples related to the configuration and game control in other feature parts)
FIG. 20-21 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in a modified example in which the setting change process can be executed during the game. The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to a form that can be changed when the power is turned on, and the change of the set value may be executed during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts the processing after step Sa16 in the main processing, the gaming machine frame 3 is opened by the staff of the game hall, etc., and the clear switch AK001 is performed together with the switching operation of turning on the lock switch 51. When the pressing operation of turning on is performed, those operations are detected, so that the display monitor 29 displays the set value set in the current pachinko gaming machine 1 on the first display unit 29A. When the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed by a staff member of the game hall or the like while this set value is displayed, it is displayed on the first display unit 29A every time the operation is detected. Numerical values are updated and displayed sequentially. Then, when the lock switch 51 is pushed in by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the operation is detected, and the set value displayed on the first display unit 29A is used as a new set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , Stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is limited to a form that can be changed when the power is turned on, based on the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on and the detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on. It may be possible to change the power at the time of turning on the power, at least based on the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on. For example, even if there is no detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are not initialized (cleared) based on the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed based on the detection of an operation of restoring the stored contents at the time of a power failure and then pressing the clear switch AK001 on. In this way, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not initialized by initializing (clearing) the stored contents of the RAM 102 with the start of power supply by turning on the power, the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the time of turning on the power Control may be performed to change the set value.

When a new set value is stored, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, the special figure holding memory, the normal figure holding memory, the game control flag setting unit 152, the game control timer setting unit 153, and the game control counter are stored. Various flags and data stored in the setting unit 154, the game control buffer setting unit 155, and the like may be deleted. In this way, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, a new hold memory in which the variable display result becomes a big hit is generated as the set value is changed, and a new normal variable winning ball device 6B is generated. Can be prevented from being released (a hit on a normal figure occurs) and an unreasonably large hit on the variable display result during execution. Further, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, the big winning opening is closed during the big hit game, and the normal variable winning ball device 6B is closed when the normal variable winning ball device 6B is open. This can prevent the player from gaining inappropriate profits. Further, when the setting change process is interrupted without setting a new setting value, it is possible to prevent the hold memory from being deleted even though the new setting value is not set. It should be noted that the setting value is not limited to the form of clearing the hold memory based on the setting of a new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting value originally set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reset. In some cases, the hold memory may be cleared. The hold storage may be cleared at the timing when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the display monitor 29, that is, when the setting change process is executed by the CPU 103. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the change in the set value from being accurately reflected in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The pachinko game machine 1 is not limited to the form in which the first prize opening and the second prize opening are closed based on the new set value set for the pachinko game machine 1, and the display monitor 29 is used for the pachinko game machine 1. The first prize opening and the second prize opening may be closed at the timing when the set setting value is displayed, that is, when the setting change process is executed by the CPU 103. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the change in the set value from being accurately reflected in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 20-22 shows a display mode in a modified example in which the first display unit 29A capable of displaying the set value on the display monitor 29 is not provided. The display monitor 29 is provided with five display units from the first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E, and the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base displayed by the second display unit 29B to the fifth display unit 29E. The setting value is not limited to the form of being displayed on the first display unit 29A, and it is not necessary to provide a display unit for displaying the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base setting value being displayed. In FIG. 20-22 (A), the display unit corresponding to the second display unit 29B to the fifth display unit 29E of the display monitor 29 displays the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and corresponds to the first display unit 29A. The set value is not displayed by the display unit.

FIG. 20-22 (B) shows an example of display control of the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base when the display unit for displaying the set value is not provided. In this case, the ratio, combination ratio, and base at the set value 1 are red, the ratio, combination ratio, and base at the setting value 2 are green, and the ratio, combination ratio, and base at the setting value 3 are blue. To display. By displaying the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base with different display colors depending on the set value, it is possible to easily grasp which set value is the numerical value. In this display control example as well, as in the above embodiment, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the set value 1 can be switched and displayed every 5 seconds, and the set value 1 is set for each operation of the display changeover switch 30. The switching display of the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at 5-second intervals is changed to the switching display of the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at the setting value 2 at 5-second intervals, and further, the connection ratio and the combination ratio at the setting value 3 are changed. , It suffices if it can be cyclically changed to the switching display of the base at 5-second intervals. Alternatively, the switching display of the connection ratio at the set value 1, the connection ratio at the set value 2, and the connection ratio at the set value 3 at 5-second intervals, the combination ratio at the set value 1, the combination ratio at the set value 2, and the combination value 3 The switching display of the role ratio at 5-second intervals, the base at the set value 1, the base at the set value 2, and the switching display at the base at the set value 3 at 5-second intervals are cyclically displayed for each operation of the display changeover switch 30. Changes may be possible.

The display monitor 29 is not limited to a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base for each set value can be displayed, and the connection ratio and the combination according to the set value of any one of the set value 1 to the set value 3. Only the ratio and the base may be displayed. For example, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated for each of the set values 1 to 3, and the highest or lowest value or the longest or shortest measurement time among the calculated comparison ratio, combination ratio, and base is calculated. Only the values and the like need to be displayed on the display monitor 29. Further, among the calculated ratios, combination ratios, and bases, the highest or lowest value and the longest or shortest measurement time value are set as the initial display on the display monitor 29, and the initial display is changed by operating the display changeover switch 30. The display of the display monitor 29 may be switchable to the value of.

The display monitor 29 has two or more of the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at the set value 1, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at the set value 2, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at the set value 3. It is possible to calculate the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base in the set values, and in addition to or in place of the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base for each setting value, the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base in these two or more setting values can be calculated. It may be possible to display on the display monitor 29. In this way, by making it possible to display the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the set values of two or more on the display monitor 29, it is possible to grasp the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in more detail. It should be noted that the composite information is not limited to a form in which the combined ratio, combination ratio, and base of two or more set values can be calculated and displayed on the display monitor 29, and the continuous ratio at two or more set values is not limited. , The combination ratio, and the average value of the base may be calculated and displayed on the display monitor 29.

The display monitor 29 may be able to display only the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base according to the set set value. Further, in the display monitor 29, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base according to the set set value are displayed as the initial display, and the initial display is changed to another set value according to the operation of the display changeover switch 30. You may switch to the display of the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. The display monitor 29 may be able to display numerical values other than the continuous ratio, the winning ratio, and the base, such as the number of prize balls per predetermined time (for example, one hour), as predetermined information according to the set value.

For example, under specific conditions such as immediately after the end of a big hit game or during a time saving state, by using a special fluctuation pattern judgment table different from the fluctuation pattern judgment table in the normal time, the fluctuation display with a specific fluctuation pattern than in the normal time ( For example, the shortened non-reach variation pattern (PA1-4)) may be facilitated. When it is possible to determine the variation pattern using the special variation pattern determination table, the determination of the variation pattern using the special variation pattern determination table is completed and switched to the normal determination according to the set value. The timing may be different. Specifically, when the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the special fluctuation pattern determination table up to the 15th fluctuation display after the jackpot game ends, and 16 after the jackpot game ends. From the second time onward, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern judgment table at the normal time, and if the set value is 2, the special fluctuation pattern judgment table up to the 10th fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game. The fluctuation pattern is determined using, and after the 11th time after the jackpot game is completed, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table at the normal time, and if the set value is 3, the jackpot game If the fluctuation pattern is determined using the special fluctuation pattern judgment table up to the 5th fluctuation display after the end, and after the 6th time after the end of the big hit game, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern judgment table at the normal time. good.

After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed in step Sa9 in the main process, or after the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, in the first 10th variation, a special variation pattern is used. When the variable display is executed, it is suggested that a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, setting value 1) is set, and after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the pachinko game machine is executed. When the fluctuation display is executed with a special fluctuation pattern at the 30th fluctuation after the setting value set to 1 is changed, a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, setting value 1) is set. It may be a game property in which attention is paid to whether or not the fluctuation display is executed in a special fluctuation pattern at a specific timing or a specific number of fluctuation displays, such as when it is confirmed that the player is present. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has such a game property, when the set setting value is 1, the RAM 102 is initialized (cleared) or set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. After the set value is changed, the rate at which fluctuations are executed in a special fluctuation pattern is the highest in the first 10 fluctuations, and when the set setting value is 3, the RAM 102 is initialized ( Clear) is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the rate at which fluctuations are executed in a special fluctuation pattern is the lowest in the first 10 fluctuations. Only when the set value is 1, after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the first time. The fluctuation may be executed in a special fluctuation pattern at the 30th fluctuation.

The switching condition (the number of fluctuations until the table is switched) for switching the fluctuation pattern judgment table for determining the fluctuation pattern from the special fluctuation pattern judgment table to the normal fluctuation pattern judgment table differs depending on the set value. It may be determined by a ratio. The determination rate of a specific variation pattern (for example, shortened non-reach (PA1-4)) decreases due to different switching conditions for switching the variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern according to the set value. Since the player can be focused on the timing, the effect of the fluctuation pattern can be enhanced.

After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, until the fluctuation display of 100 times) is executed, each fluctuation pattern determination table in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation display of a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach) is normal is used. The fluctuation pattern may be increased or decreased as compared with the case of determining the fluctuation pattern. In this case, even if the execution of the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is decided at different determination ratios depending on whether the set setting value is 1, 2, or 3. good. As a result, after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or Since the player can pay attention to the number of fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach until the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is executed, the effect of the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is produced. Can be enhanced. Further, after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time elapses, or a predetermined number of times of variation display is executed. A variation pattern that can be determined only until is set is provided for each set value, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set for the player by executing the variation display according to the variation pattern according to these set values. It may be possible to notify.

After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, until the variation display (100 times) is executed, the determination rate of the variation pattern other than the super reach such as non-reach and normal reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a fluctuation pattern different from the normal fluctuation pattern such as non-reach, normal reach, super reach, etc. (for example, the fluctuation time is extremely short, such as 0.1). The determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern or the fluctuation pattern having an extremely long fluctuation time such as 10 minutes) may be different.

After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, in the specific period until the variable display (100 times) is executed, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested at the rate at which the specific effect is executed. For example, it is possible to execute a high setting suggestion effect that suggests that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is an advantageous setting value for the player, and the setting set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 for a specific period. When the value is 1 (the setting value most advantageous to the player), the high setting value suggestion effect is most likely to be executed, and the setting value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3 (the setting value most disadvantageous to the player). ), It is sufficient to make the high setting value suggestion effect most difficult to execute. In a specific period, at least one of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed since the last time the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 was stopped. The determination rate of the fluctuation pattern may be different.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured as a pachinko gaming machine capable of controlling the gaming state to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends, and the game after the jackpot game ends based on the fact that the game ball passes the third count switch during the jackpot game. The state may be controllable to a probabilistic state. In this case, as the jackpot type, the jackpot type that opens the second jackpot during the jackpot game, that is, the jackpot type that allows the game ball to pass through the third count switch during the jackpot game (hereinafter, jackpot X). The second big prize opening is not opened during the big hit game, that is, the big hit type (hereinafter, big hit Y) in which the game ball cannot pass through the third count switch during the big hit game is provided, and the determination ratio of these big hit X and the big hit Y is provided. May be different depending on the set value. By doing so, it is possible to make the ratio of the game state controlled to the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game different according to the set value, so that the game interest can be improved.

In addition to or instead of the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit and the decision rate of the big hit type, the number of prize balls when the game ball wins each winning opening, and the big hit in each round during the big hit game The maximum number of winnings of the game ball to the winning opening may be made different according to the set value. Further, the opening patterns of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening during the big hit game may be made different according to the set value. As a result, the number of prize balls given in the big hit game state can be made different according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

A movable body may be provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and it may be possible to execute a movable body effect in which the movable body is operated during a game such as a variable display or a big hit game. When such a movable body is provided, variable winning initialization control such as confirmation of advancing / retreating operation of the regulating member inside the second large winning opening can be executed, and at the same time, confirmation of the operation of the movable body and the movable body at the initial position can be performed. When the movable body initialization control to be moved can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 and a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the power is turned on in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the pachinko gaming machine 1). When a new set value is set in 1), the variable prize initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed. As a result, the new set value can be accurately reflected in the movement of the regulating member or the movable body. The variable winning prize initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed after the execution of step Sa13 or step Sa14 in the main process. For example, variable winning initialization control or movable body initialization control may be executed at the timing when the first timer interrupt occurs. When the variable prize initialization control and the movable body initialization control can be executed, the variable prize initialization control may be started at a timing prior to the movable body initialization control. Alternatively, the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be started at the same time, and the variable winning initialization control may be terminated before the movable body initialization control. As a result, the initialization control related to the winning of the game ball can be appropriately performed.

The determination rate of the super reach fluctuation pattern may differ depending on the set value. The specific variable display pattern may be a fluctuation pattern different from the fluctuation pattern of the super reach. The setting of which variation pattern is used as the specific variable display pattern can be arbitrarily changed according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

20-23 and 20-24 show a modified example in which the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are installed on the side of the main board 11. By providing the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated unless the staff of the game hall or the like opens the frame 3 for the game machine. be. In addition to this, by providing a security cover 500A that covers the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the pachinko machine frame 3 is closed. It may be possible to prevent an illegal change of the set value of the gaming machine 1.

The security cover 500A is attached to the lower part of the right side of the outer frame 1a. As a result, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A approaches the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, so that the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated. Can be. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the security cover 500A is separated from the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, so that the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 can be operated. The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are covered with a cover body from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the cover body is covered with a security cover 500A from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. By covering from the back side of the gaming machine 1 (pressing the cover body forward with the security cover 500A), it is more powerful to change the illegal set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It may be possible to prevent it. When the setting changeover switch 52 is replaced by the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with a cover body or a security cover 500A instead of the setting changeover switch 52.

FIG. 20-25 shows a modified example in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the security cover 500B may be provided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the gaming machine frame 3. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500B is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the gaming machine frame 3, and the security cover 500B is held by the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 on the back surface. It suffices to make it immovable from the state of being covered from the side. Then, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be operated by sliding the security cover 500B. When the setting changeover switch 52 is replaced by the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with the security cover 500B instead of the setting changeover switch 52.

FIG. 20-26 shows a modified example in which the security cover is rotatably provided. Specifically, the left end portion of the security cover 500C may be rotatably supported with respect to a pivot axis facing in the vertical direction provided on the back surface side of the gaming machine frame 3. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500C is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the gaming machine frame 3, and the security cover 500C is set as the lock switch 51. The changeover switch 52 may be made immovable from the state of being covered from the back side. Then, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be operated by rotating the security cover 500C around a pivot axis (not shown). When the setting changeover switch 52 is replaced by the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with the security cover 500C instead of the setting changeover switch 52.

When these security covers are provided so as to overlap the main board 11, the security covers are made of a transparent resin material or the like so as not to interfere with the visibility of the mounting surface of the main board 11 and the seal. May be good.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 may have different playability such as a probabilistic loop type and a V probabilistic type. In the case of the probabilistic loop type or V probabilistic type, a function (so-called small hit time) that can increase the number of balls held by a small hit that targets the first big winning opening after the end of a specific big hit game is provided. You may have it. In the case of a gaming machine having a small hit time function, the big hit probability is made different according to the set value (for example, in the case of the set value 1, the big hit probability in the normal state is set to 1/200 and the big hit probability in the probability variation state is set. Is set to 1/20, and in the case of the set value 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is set to 1/300 and the jackpot probability in the probabilistic state is set to 1/30). , Since the initial hit probability is higher than when other set values are set, it is easier to enter the small hit time, but the probability of becoming a big hit during probability variation control is also higher than when other set values are set. Is also high, so it is easy for the small hit time to end. In other words, when a pachinko machine capable of performing probability variation control is equipped with a small hit time function, the higher the setting value for which the large hit probability is set in the normal state, the higher the probability of entering the small hit time, while the smaller the probability. It is difficult for the hit time to continue, and the lower the set value for which the jackpot probability in the normal state is set, the lower the probability of entering the small hit time, but the easier it is for the small hit time to continue. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the probabilistic loop type and the V probabilistic type, not only the range of the game can be expanded by installing the small hit time function, but also a set value with a low big hit probability is set. Even with the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player can be motivated to play the game.

In the V-probability variation type pachinko gaming machine 1, the opening pattern of the probability variation control determination grand prize opening in the probability variation control determination round is changed to a long-term opening pattern (the opening pattern in which the game ball easily wins the probability variation control determination grand prize opening). ) And the short-term opening pattern (opening pattern in which the game ball is difficult to win in the large winning opening for probability variation control), these long-term opening patterns and short-term opening patterns are set according to the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. By deciding at different ratios, the actual probability of entering the probability variation (probability variation jackpot ratio) may be different.

A big hit type determination gate is provided at a predetermined position in the game area (for example, an upper position of the second big winning opening), and the game ball passes through the big hit type determination gate after the special symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating the big hit. The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be extracted at the same timing, and the jackpot game according to the jackpot type determined based on the extracted MR2 value may be started. When the jackpot type determination gate is provided in this way, the jackpot type is determined at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, 16 round jackpot and 4 round jackpot are provided as the jackpot type). If the setting value is 1, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds jackpot is the highest, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When is 3, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds jackpot is the lowest).

The lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 may be provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 3. When the lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 3 in this way, the lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 is used on the ball striking operation handle or the ball striking launcher. By providing it in the vicinity, the glass door frame 3a may not be operated unless it is opened.

It is only necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot gaming state, at least in a different ratio according to the set value, and the jackpot type and The fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. It fluctuates at a different rate according to the set value. While deciding whether to set the display result as "big hit" or "small hit", the big hit type is common regardless of the set value. And when the fluctuation pattern is determined, even if the set value is changed, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern is not changed, so that the set value is not suggested to the player or the like, or it is difficult to suggest it. When not only the fluctuation display result but also the fluctuation pattern is determined at a different ratio according to the set value, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern is also changed when the set value is changed. The setting value can be suggested, or it becomes easy to suggest.

As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, the CPU 103 executes the main process when the power supply is started by turning on the power, so that the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 operate. Depending on the detection result, it is possible to control any of the setting change state, setting confirmation state, initialization state, and power failure recovery state. The setting change state is a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001. The setting confirmation state is a state in which the set value can be confirmed on the display monitor 29. The initialization state is different from the setting change state and the setting confirmation state, and is a state in which the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared). The power failure recovery state is a state in which the stored contents of the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of the power failure.

FIG. 20-27 shows an example of state control according to the switch detection when the power is turned on. If the lock switch 51 is on and the clear switch AK001 is on when the power supply is started by turning on the power based on the operation of the power switch AK002, the setting change process is performed in step Sa13 of the main process. By being executed, the setting change state is controlled. In this case, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9 of the main process. On the other hand, when the lock switch 51 is on and the clear switch AK001 is off when the power supply is started, the setting confirmation process is executed in the main process step AKS002 to set the settings. Control the confirmation status. In this case, step Sa9 of the main process is not executed, and the stored contents of the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of power failure by steps Sa41 and Sa42. When the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is on when the power supply is started, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9 of the main process, so that the initialization state is established. To control. In this case, since it is determined in step Sa12 of the main process that the lock switch 51 is off, the setting change process of step Sa13 is not executed. When the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is off when the power supply is started, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of power failure by the main processing steps Sa41 and Sa42. By doing so, the power failure recovery state is controlled. In this case, since it is determined in step AKS001 of the main process that the lock switch 51 is off, the setting confirmation process of step AKS002 is not executed. In this way, along with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 detect various operations such as on / off switching operation and pressing operation by the staff of the amusement park. , The state can be controlled according to the detection results.

(Explanation of means related to the above feature section)
The above embodiment includes the following feature parts. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine in which a set value can be set, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 is provided with a dedicated setting value display means for displaying the set setting value, thereby preventing an increase in the cost of the gaming machine. There was a problem that it could not be done. Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 related to a feature unit that solves this problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change process of Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting value 1 to the setting value 3), and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
A game that adds game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening, etc.) Value-adding means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the process while the jackpot is open),
An information display means (for example, a display monitor 29) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means, and
With
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, display by the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this means 1, it is not necessary to individually provide a display device for displaying the set set value, so that the cost increase of the gaming machine can be prevented. Can be done.

As a gaming machine of means 2 of the above-mentioned feature part,
The information display means can display predetermined information according to a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, a base, etc. on the display monitor 29).
The gaming machine described in the means 1 characterized by the above is described, and in this means 2, the state of the gaming machine can be easily grasped.

As a gaming machine of means 3 of the above-mentioned feature part,
The information display means can sequentially display predetermined information of each set value (for example, the display monitor 29 displays short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative continuous ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2). (Parts that are displayed sequentially at 5 second intervals, etc.)
The gaming machine described in the means 2 characterized by the above is described, and in the means 3, it is possible to easily grasp the predetermined information of each set value.

As a gaming machine of means 4 of the above-mentioned feature part,
The information display means can display predetermined information of each set value in different display modes (for example, the set value 1 displays the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in red, and the set value 2 shows the continuous ratio. The role ratio and base are displayed in green, and at the setting value 3, the continuous ratio, role ratio, and base are displayed in blue, etc.)
The gaming machine described in the means 2 or the means 3 is described, and the means 4 can easily grasp the predetermined information of each set value.

As a gaming machine of means 5 of the above-mentioned feature part,
Equipped with an operating means (for example, display changeover switch 30)
The information display means can switch and display predetermined information of each set value according to the operation of the operation means (for example, by operating the display changeover switch 30, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base of the set value 1 can be displayed. The part that switches the display to the display of the set value 2 ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the display of the setting value 2 ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are changed to the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base display of the setting value 3. Switching part, etc.)
The gaming machine described in any one of the means 2 to the means 4 is described, and the means 5 can easily grasp the predetermined information of each set value.

As a gaming machine of means 6 of the above-mentioned feature part,
The information display means displays predetermined information according to the set value set by the setting means (for example, a portion capable of displaying only the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base according to the set set value. Such)
The gaming machine described in any one of the means 2 to the means 5 characterized by the above is described, and in this means 6, the work of confirming the predetermined information of the set value set by the setting means is easily performed. be able to.

As a gaming machine of means 7 of the above-mentioned feature part,
Calculation means that can calculate information about the game value given by the game value-giving means (for example, the ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), and the cumulative ratio (%) for 6000 CPU 103s, the combination. The part for calculating the ratio (%), the base calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls (base 1 (%)), and the base calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls (base 2 (%)). Etc.)
The calculation means can individually calculate the information for each set value (for example, a general prize ball, a first starting opening prize ball, an ordinary electric prize ball, a special electric prize ball, a total prize ball, etc. The total input is stored in the storage area (ring buffer) according to the set value, so that it can be calculated individually for each set value, etc.),
The information display means displays only the information corresponding to the specific set value of any one of the set values (for example, the ratio corresponding to the set value of any one of the set value 1 to the set value 3). Role ratio, part where only the base can be displayed, etc.)
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 6 is described, and the means 7 can easily confirm the information.

As a gaming machine of means 8 of the above-mentioned feature part,
Calculation means that can calculate information about the game value given by the game value-giving means (for example, the ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), and the cumulative ratio (%) for 6000 CPU 103s, the combination. The part for calculating the ratio (%), the base calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls (base 1 (%)), and the base calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls (base 2 (%)). Etc.)
The calculation means can individually calculate individual information which is the information according to each set value, and can also calculate compound information which is the information according to two or more different set values (for example,). The total ratio, combination ratio, base calculation part, etc. of 2 or more set values),
The information display means can display the information and the composite information (for example, a portion that calculates a connection ratio, a combination ratio, and a base in two or more set values and can display them on the display monitor 29).
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 7 is described, and according to the means 8, the state of the gaming machine can be grasped in more detail.

(Explanation of production control related to other feature parts)
FIG. 20-28 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the embodiment including the above-mentioned feature unit. It suffices that this effect control main process can be executed instead of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the same initialization process (step AKS011) as in the above embodiment, and then, unlike the above embodiment, the power-on command process (step). AKS012) is executed. After executing the command processing at power-on, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013), and if it is off (step AKS013; No), as in the above embodiment. The process of step AKS013 is repeatedly executed and waits. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn it off (step AKS014), the command analysis process (step AKS015), and the effect control process process. (Step AKS016) and the effect random number update process (step AKS017) are executed in order.

FIG. 20-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS012 as the command process at power-on. For example, the effect control CPU 120 acquires an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 as a reception command with the start of power supply, and determines the content thereof. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception command is the command 9000H which is the RAM clear notification command (step AKS021). If it is not a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; No), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the command 9200H, which is a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022). If it is not a power failure recovery stop command (step AKS022; No), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the command 9100H that is the setting change start command (step AKS023). If it is not the setting change start command (step AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the command 9400H which is the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024). If it is not the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; No), the process returns to step AKS021, and steps AKS021 to AKS024 are repeatedly executed and waited until the reception command is acquired. If the reception command cannot be acquired and a predetermined error determination time has elapsed, it may be notified that an error of the reception command has occurred.

If it is determined in step AKS023 that the reception command is a setting change start command (step AKS023; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step AKS025). In the game stop state start processing, the progress of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game is stopped in response to the game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state start processing executed in step AKS025, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, commands other than the setting change end command are set to invalidate reception. do it. As a result, it is sufficient to regulate so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game, such as a variable display of the effect symbol and an effect display during a big hit, are not executed. When the setting change start command is received, various effects associated with the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is in the game stop state corresponding to the setting change state and the game is not in the game stop state are not executed. There is a limit as a range or a limit.

After the game stop state start processing is executed in step AKS025, control is performed to start the setting change notification (step AKS026). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the setting change notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance in response to the setting change notification, and outputs the setting change notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, control should be performed. After the control of the setting change notification is started in this way, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step AKS027). In step AKS027, when the command received from the main board 11 is the command 93XXH which is the setting change end command, it may be determined that the setting change is completed. If the setting change end command is not received and the setting change is not completed (step AKS027; No), step AKS027 is repeatedly executed and waits.

When it is determined in step AKS027 to end the setting change (step AKS027; Yes), control is performed to end the setting change notification (step AKS028). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to end the display of the setting change notification screen in the effect display device 5 and end the output of the setting change notification sound by the speakers 8L and 8R. After the control of the setting change notification is completed in this way, the processing at the end of the game stop state is executed (step AKS029). In the process at the end of the game stop state, a setting may be made to enable command reception from the main board 11, which has been invalidated. As a result, the regulation may be lifted so that various effects as the game progresses, such as a variable display of the effect symbol and an effect display during a big hit, can be executed.

After that, control is performed to execute the initialization notification (step AKS030). For example, the effect control CPU 120 initializes to the effect display device 5 in the initialization notification period until a predetermined initialization notification time elapses, based on the control data prepared in advance in response to the initialization notification. Control may be performed so that the notification screen is displayed and the initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Even if it is determined in step AKS021 that the reception command is a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; Yes), the initialization notification may be executed by proceeding to step AKS030. In this way, it is possible to notify that the stored contents of the RAM 102 have been initialized (cleared) in response to the case where an operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected with the start of power supply by turning on the power.

If it is determined in step AKS024 that the reception command is the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step AKS031). In the game stop state start processing executed in step AKS031, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, commands other than the setting confirmation end command are set to invalidate reception. do it. As a result, it is sufficient to regulate so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game, such as a variable display of the effect symbol and an effect display during a big hit, are not executed. When the setting confirmation start command is received, various effects associated with the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is in the game stop state corresponding to the setting confirmation state and the game is not in the stop state are not executed. There is a limit as a range or a limit.

After the game stop state start processing is executed in step AKS031, control is performed to start the setting confirmation notification (step AKS032). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the setting confirmation notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance in response to the setting confirmation notification, and outputs the setting confirmation notification voice from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, control should be performed. After the control of the setting confirmation notification is started in this way, it is determined whether or not to end the setting confirmation (step AKS033). In step AKS033, when the command received from the main board 11 is the command 9401H which is the setting confirmation end command, it may be determined that the setting confirmation is completed. If the setting confirmation end command is not received and the setting confirmation is not completed (step AKS033; No), step AKS033 is repeatedly executed and waits.

When it is determined in step AKS033 that the setting confirmation is completed (step AKS033; Yes), control is performed to end the setting confirmation notification (step AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to end the display of the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5 and end the output of the setting confirmation notification sound by the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, after the control of the setting confirmation notification is completed, the game stop state end processing is executed (step AKS035). As a result, the regulation may be lifted so that various effects as the game progresses, such as a variable display of the effect symbol and an effect display during a big hit, can be executed.

After that, control may be performed to execute the power failure recovery notification. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the power failure recovery notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance in response to the power failure recovery notification, and outputs the power failure recovery notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, control may be performed. Even when it is determined in step AKS022 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022; Yes), the power failure recovery notification may be executed. In these cases, if it is possible to notify that the stored contents of the RAM 102 have been restored to the contents at the time of a power failure in response to the case where the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is not detected due to the start of power supply by turning on the power. good.

FIG. 20-30 shows the priority of control with respect to notification by effect control, screen display, and the like in this embodiment. The pachinko game machine 1 is in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled as the power supply is started by turning on the power. Correspondingly, the effect control CPU 120 executes the game stop state start processing in step AKS025 and step AKS031 of the power-on command processing. After the game stop state start processing is executed, the reception of commands different from the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and the control related to the normal effect is restricted from being executed. Therefore, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is the highest priority among the priorities related to the effect control. For example, the priority AKP02 of the setting screen such as the power saving function has a lower priority than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. The power saving function setting screen shows the power saving function when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (game machine frame 3) is set to a predetermined position as a specific position. It is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device 5 in order to enable the presence / absence, type, setting of the current date / time by RTC, and the like. Since the priority AKP03 such as the magnet error notification has a lower priority than the priority AKP02 such as the power saving function setting screen, the priority is lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. Since the priority AKP0Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game in the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, the priority is lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. It becomes a degree.

In this way, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is higher than the priority AKP02 of the setting screen such as the power saving function, so that the control to start the setting change notification is performed by the step AKS026 of the command processing at power-on. If the setting is changed or the setting confirmation notification is started by step AKS032, the switch position of the output amount changeover switch is temporarily switched to a specific position before the setting change or the setting confirmation is completed. Even if this happens, the display of the power saving function setting screen is not started by switching the output amount changeover switch. In this way, the display related to the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the setting change notification screen and the setting confirmation notification screen is displayed with priority over the display related to the output amount or output control of the effect such as the power saving function setting screen. As a result, the display related to the set value is appropriately displayed, and it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

(Explanation of feature 80AK)
FIG. 20-31 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control timer interrupt process executed in the feature unit 80AK capable of executing the setting confirmation process during the game (during the game). In the feature unit 80AK, the set value can be confirmed by operating the lock switch 51 on after the power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to a form that can be confirmed when the power is turned on, and the confirmation of the set value may be executed during the game (during the game). In this case, instead of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4, the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIGS. 20-31 may be executed. Specifically, in the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIGS. 20-31, the process of step S16 in the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is executed, and then the ongoing setting confirmation process is performed (step 80AKS001). ). By executing the ongoing setting confirmation process, the display monitor 29 causes the first display unit 29A to display the set value set in the current pachinko gaming machine 1. This display is not changed even if the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed by a staff member of the game hall, and is a display for confirming the set value set in the current pachinko game machine 1. There is. When the execution of the setting confirmation process (in progress setting confirmation process) is started while the game is in progress, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the effect control board is displayed from the main board 11. A command 9400H, which is a setting confirmation start command, is transmitted to 12. When the execution of the ongoing setting confirmation process ends, the setting confirmation state ends, and the command 9401H, which is a setting confirmation end command, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

FIG. 20-32 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 80AKS001 as the ongoing setting confirmation process in the feature unit 80AK. In the in-progress setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the lock switch 51 is on based on the lock switch signal which is the output signal of the lock switch 51 (step 80AKS002). When the lock switch 51 is on (step 80AKS002; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting is being confirmed (step 80AKS003). In step 80AKS003, for example, it may be determined that the setting is being confirmed in the period from the control in 80AKS007 described later to the control in step 80AKS010.

If the setting is not being confirmed (step 80AKS003; No), it is determined whether or not the game is in progress (step 80AKS004). In the process of step 80AKS004, for example, the game is in progress by confirming the value of the special figure process flag (for example, confirming whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is "2"), that is, the special figure. It may be determined whether or not the figure is changing. In this embodiment, it is determined whether the game is in progress or not depending on whether the special figure is changing, but the concept that the game is in progress is not limited to the change of the special figure, for example, a player. Is a concept that includes a state in which a player is playing a game, such as firing a game medium, a small hit game state, or a big hit game state.

When it is determined that the game is in progress (step 80AKS004; Yes), the CPU 103 controls to suspend the fluctuation of the special figure (step 80AKS005). After executing the process of step 80AKS005, or when it is determined in step 80AKS004 that the game is not in progress, that is, the special figure is not changing (step 80AKS004; No), the CPU 103 advances the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game state is shifted to the game stop state (step AKS006). In this embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, an example is shown in which the change of the special figure is temporarily stopped by the process of step 80AKS005 if the special figure is changing, but the change of the special figure is in progress. Regardless of whether or not, the variation of the special figure may be temporarily stopped when shifting to the game stop state in the process of step 80AKS006. That is, the process of step 80AKS006 for shifting to the game stop state may include the process of 80AKS005.

After executing the process of step 80AKS006, or when it is determined in step 80AKS003 that the setting is being confirmed (step 80AKS003; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the setting confirmation state in which the set value can be confirmed (step 80AKS007). ), Ends the ongoing setting confirmation process. In the process of step 80AKS007, a command that becomes a setting confirmation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is set in the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed. 9400H is transmitted.

When it is determined in step 80AKS002 that the lock switch is off (step 80AKS002; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the game is stopped (step 80AKS008). In the process of step 80AKS008, for example, by checking the state of the game stop state flag that is set to the on state when the game is shifted to the game stop state in the process of step 80AKS006, it is possible to determine whether or not the game is in the game stop state. You just have to judge. The game stop state flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. When it is determined that the game is not in the stopped state (step 80AKS008; No), the CPU 103 ends the ongoing setting confirmation process as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is in the game stop state (step 80AKS008; Yes), the CPU 103 shifts the game state from the game stop state to the normal state (cancels the game stop state) and turns off the game stop state flag. Clear to (step 80AKS009). Further, in the process of step 80AKS009, control is performed to restart the fluctuation of the special figure paused in the process of step 80AKS005. In the process of step 80AKS009, for example, the state of the special figure pause flag set to the on state when the process of step 80AKS005 is executed is confirmed, and if it is the on state, the state of the special figure pause flag is changed. It suffices to clear the off state and restart the fluctuation of the special figure (if it is in the off state, it is not necessary to perform the process of restarting the fluctuation of the special figure). The special figure pause flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

After executing the process of step 80AKS009, the CPU 103 controls to end the setting confirmation state in which the set value can be confirmed (80AKS010), and ends the ongoing setting confirmation process. In the process of step 80AKS007, a command 9401H, which is a setting confirmation end command, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 with the end of the setting confirmation state.

FIG. 20-33 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process executed in the feature unit 80AK capable of executing the setting confirmation process during the game (during the game). In the effect control main process executed in the feature unit 80AK, unlike the effect control main process shown in FIGS. 20-28, after the effect random number update process is executed in step AKS017, the changing setting confirmation process (step 80AKS01A). After executing, the process returns to step AKS013.

FIG. 20-34 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 80AKS01A of FIG. 20-33 as the setting confirmation process during fluctuation. In the changing setting confirmation process shown in FIGS. 20-34, the effect control CPU 120 determines, for example, whether or not the set setting value is being confirmed so that it can be confirmed on the display monitor 29. (Step AKS051). In step AKS051, for example, it may be determined that the setting is being confirmed in the period from the control in step AKS055 or step 80AKS011 to the control in step AKS060. If the setting is not being confirmed (step AKS051; No), it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation start command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step AKS052). At this time, when the setting confirmation start command is received (step AKS052; Yes), it is determined whether or not the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in progress, that is, whether or not the variable display is in progress (step). AKS053). In step AKS053, for example, by confirming the value of the effect process flag (for example, confirming whether or not the value of the effect process flag is "2"), it is determined whether or not the variable display is in progress. good. In step AKS053, it is determined whether or not the variable display is in progress, but it may be determined whether or not the game is in progress. For example, a customer waiting demo designation command transmitted from the main board 11 may be used. Even if it is determined that the game is not in progress in the period from the reception until the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received, and in the other period, it is determined that the game is in progress. good. In addition, it is determined that the game is not in progress during the period from receiving the customer waiting demo designation command to receiving the command indicating that the game medium is being launched, and the other period is in progress. It may be determined that there is.

When it is determined in step AKS053 that the variable display is in progress (step AKS053; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the changing setting confirmation flag to the ON state (step AKS054). The changing setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that the setting confirmation start command has been received while the game is in progress. After executing the process of step AKS054, the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the setting confirmation notification during fluctuation (step 80AKS011). In the process of step 80AKS011, for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-35 (B), the effect display device 5 displays that the setting is being confirmed, and the reduced symbol 80AK001 is changed as a display indicating that the setting is being changed. Control to display, that is, control to display the changing setting confirmation notification screen 80AKD02. The reduced symbol 80AK001 is displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the reduced symbol 80AK001 also starts to fluctuate at the same time when the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate. Further, the reduced symbol 80AK001 also ends the fluctuation when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol ends. Further, the reduced symbol 80AK001 is displayed at a position that is always visible to the player regardless of the presence or absence of movement of a moving accessory such as a movable object. If the player can recognize the type of the symbol, a part of the reduced symbol 80AK001 may not be visible. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-35, the reduced symbol 80AK001 is variably displayed at the lower left position of the screen on the image display device 5. Therefore, since the reduced symbol 80AK001 is continuously displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized at all times, it is not necessary to consider the switching timing of the display of the reduced symbol 80AK001 as compared with the case where the reduced symbol 80AK001 is displayed only for a predetermined period, which increases the development load. It is possible to easily recognize that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed by visually recognizing the variable display of the reduced symbol 80AK001 while reducing the amount. In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the reduced symbol 80AK001 is variably displayed at the same position at the time of normal operation and at the time of setting confirmation, but it is displayed at different positions at the time of normal operation and at the time of setting confirmation. May be good. In addition, it may be displayed at a position (for example, closer to the center of the screen) that is more conspicuous when the setting is being confirmed than in the normal case.

After executing the process of step 80AKS011, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the effect restriction state that limits the effect to be executed thereafter (step 80AKS012), and ends the changing setting confirmation process. On the other hand, when it is determined in step AKS053 that the variable display is not being performed (step AKS053; No), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the setting confirmation notification (step AKS055). In the process of step AKS055, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (A), the effect display device 5 is controlled to display that the setting is being confirmed, that is, the setting confirmation notification screen 80AKD01 is displayed. After executing the process of step AKS055, the effect control CPU 120 ends the changing setting confirmation process.

As shown in FIGS. 20-35 (A) and (B), whether or not the reduced symbol 80AK001 is variablely displayed differs depending on whether the setting is confirmed during the variable display or not. .. Therefore, it is possible to control the display according to the timing of confirming the setting. Further, when the setting is confirmed during the fluctuation, the reduced symbol 80AK001 is variably displayed as shown in FIGS. 20-35 (B). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a misunderstanding that the fluctuation has become invalid.

If it is determined in step AKS051 that the setting is being confirmed (step AKS051; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059). At this time, if the setting confirmation end command has not been received (step AKS059; No), the changing setting confirmation process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059; Yes), control is performed to end the setting confirmation notification (step AKS060).

After executing the process of step AKS060, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the changing setting confirmation flag is on (step AKS061). At this time, if the changing setting confirmation flag is off (step AKS061; No), the changing setting confirmation process ends. On the other hand, when the changing setting confirmation flag is on (step AKS056; Yes), control is performed to release the effect restriction state and shift to the normal state (step 80AKS013), as shown in FIGS. 20-35. In addition, a notification indicating that the effect control after the setting confirmation is completed, that is, a control for displaying the restoration notification screen 80AKD03 is performed (step 80AKS014). The restoration notification screen 80AKD03 displayed in the process of step 80AKS014 is, for example, the timing of receiving the symbol confirmation command indicating the end of the variable display from the main board 11 side, or the next after receiving the symbol confirmation command. It suffices to be displayed until the timing when the variable start command indicating the start of the variable display is received. Here, if the setting is confirmed during the fluctuation, the side of the main board 11 shifts to the game stop state, and the control for matching the side of the main board 11 and the side of the effect control board 12 is performed. It gets complicated. In this embodiment, the restoration notification screen 80AKD03 displayed in step 80AKS014 displays the period until the change in which the setting is confirmed is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing on the side of the effect control board 12 from becoming complicated. After executing the process of step 80AKS014, the effect control CPU 120 clears the changing setting confirmation flag to turn it off (step AKS062), and then ends the changing setting confirmation process. The setting confirmation notification screen 80AKD01, the changing setting confirmation notification screen 80AKD02, and the restoration notification screen 80AKD03 are not limited to the modes displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 5, and the display area of the effect display device 5 is displayed. It may be a mode that is partially displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the premise that the feature unit 80AK shifts to the setting change state based on the fact that the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 are each operated to the on state at the start of power supply. When the lock switch 51 is turned on during the fluctuation, the changing setting confirmation process shown in FIGS. 20-34 notifies that the setting is being confirmed and that the setting is being changed (step 80AKS011). .. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform setting confirmation and display control, and it is possible to increase the variety of business forms.

Further, in the feature unit 80AK, the reduced symbol 80AK001 is variably displayed to notify that it is changing (step 80AKS011). Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform setting confirmation and display control, and it is possible to increase the variety of business forms. Further, when the lock switch 51 is turned on during the fluctuation, the fluctuation of the special figure is controlled to be temporarily stopped (step 80AKS005). According to this, it is possible to prevent the control of the game control means from becoming complicated during the setting confirmation state. In addition to this, in the feature unit 80AK, when the lock switch 51 returns to the off state (when the setting confirmation is completed), the paused change of the special figure is restarted (step 80AKS009). Therefore, the control of the variable display can be restarted after the setting is confirmed, and the game progress can be performed according to the situation.

Further, in the feature unit 80AK, when the lock switch 51 is turned on during the fluctuation, the effect to be executed thereafter is limited (step 80AKS012). Then, from the timing of receiving the symbol confirmation command indicating the end of the variable display from the side of the main board 11 to the timing of receiving the variation start command indicating the start of the next variable display after receiving the symbol confirmation command, FIG. 20- As shown in 35, a notification indicating that the effect control after the setting confirmation is completed, that is, a control for displaying the restoration notification screen 80AKD03 is performed (step 80AKS014). According to this, it is possible to prevent the processing by the effect control means from becoming complicated.

(Explanation of a modified example of the feature 80AK)
In the above embodiment, when the setting confirmation is performed during the fluctuation in the process of step 80AKS012 of FIGS. 20-34, the variable display of the reduced symbol 80AK001 (control to display the variable setting confirmation notification screen 80AKD02). An example of shifting to the effect restriction state that restricts other effects is shown. For example, the setting confirmation notification screen 80AKD02 that is changing in the process of 80AKS011 is displayed on the player side more than the other effects (higher priority (higher priority). The layer may be displayed higher), and other effects may be executed on the back side of the changing setting confirmation notification screen 80AKD02. That is, by executing the other effect on the back side of the changing setting confirmation notification screen 80AKD02, the other effect may be made invisible, and the effect may be restricted. Even in this case, the variable display priority of the reduced symbol 80AK001 may be displayed higher than that of the changing setting confirmation notification screen 80AKD02.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example of displaying on the effect display device 5 that the setting is being confirmed in step AKS055 and step 80AKS011 is shown. It may be notified by voice from 8R that the setting is being confirmed (for example, at "volume 6 (maximum)" (upper limit volume "97.0"), which is the maximum volume that can be output by the pachinko gaming machine 1. , "The setting is being changed" is output, etc.), and the lamp such as the game effect lamp 9 may be set to a special lighting display to notify that the setting is being confirmed. Further, an example in which the reduced symbol is variably displayed on the effect display device 5 as a display indicating that the movement is changing in step 80AKS011 is shown, but similarly, the reduction symbol is being changed by voice from the speakers 8L and 8R. You may notify that there is, or you may notify that it is changing by blinking a lamp such as the game effect lamp 9. Note that the output timings of the notification that the setting is being confirmed and the notification that the setting is being changed, which are performed in step 80AKS011, are different when the notifications are in the same mode such as voice output. Control may be performed (in the case of display on the effect display device 5, it may be displayed at a different position as shown in FIG. 20-35 (B)). In the case of notifying by lighting the lamps, the notification may be made by turning on the dedicated lamps or lighting or blinking one lamp at different timings and different display colors. Further, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the reduced symbol 80AK001 is displayed together with the setting confirmation notification screen 80AKD01 to display the changing setting confirmation notification screen 80AKD02 to notify that the setting confirmation is changing. Instead of displaying the reduced symbol 80AK001 in a variable manner, a dedicated notification screen may be separately prepared and displayed, for example, displaying a changing character.

If the setting is confirmed during the fluctuation, for example, the setting is confirmed from the external terminal board of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown) to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. A signal indicating that the game has been broken (confirmation signal) may be output. Similarly, when the setting is changed, the setting is changed from the external terminal board (not shown) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. A signal indicating that (a signal being changed) may be output. According to this, security can be improved by outputting a changing signal to the outside.

Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-35 (A) and (B), a display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed in the processing of step 81AKS011 and step AKS055 shown in FIGS. 20-34. Although the example to be performed is shown, in addition to this, for example, the history of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be displayed. The history of the set value may be cumulatively stored on the side of the effect control board 12 by storing the set value information together with the RTC information in the backup area of the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12, for example. Alternatively, the history of the set value can be obtained by storing the set value information together with the RTC information in a predetermined area in a non-volatile storage device (for example, a flash memory) provided separately from the RAM 122. It may be stored cumulatively on the side. Alternatively, when the set value history is stored in the backup area together with the RTC information in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, the setting confirmation start command is transmitted. By transmitting a set value history command prepared in advance as an effect control command capable of specifying the history of the set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, power is supplied on the effect control board 12 side. It may be possible to identify it with the start of.

(Explanation of means relating to feature 80AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned feature unit 80AK, as a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine that variablely displays a decorative symbol or a reduced symbol, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-140734. However, in the techniques described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2016-140734, control according to the timing of confirming the setting is not considered. Therefore, it is still insufficient from the viewpoint of preferably performing setting confirmation and display control. Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 80AK for providing a gaming machine capable of suitably performing setting confirmation and display control.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value, and
A setting state control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) that can control the change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means is provided.
The setting state control means controls the change permission state when a specific operation is performed on the operation unit and power is supplied before the start of power supply (for example, CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa12). When the specific operation is performed on the operation unit during the variable display after power supply, the setting value is controlled to a setting confirmation state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of 80AKS001). ),
A notification means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of 80AKS01A) for notifying that the setting confirmation state is being controlled during the variable display, the variable display is being performed, and the setting confirmation state is being controlled is provided.
It may be a gaming machine characterized by further being provided.
According to such a configuration, setting confirmation and display control can be preferably performed, and the variety of business forms can be increased.

As a gaming machine of means 2 related to the feature unit 80AK,
The notification means notifies that the setting confirmation state is being controlled or is being variably displayed by variably displaying the reduced identification information (for example, variably displaying the reduced symbol 80AK001).
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 80AK.
In such a configuration, setting confirmation and display control can be preferably performed, and the variety of business forms can be increased.

As a gaming machine of means 3 according to the feature unit 80AK,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) provided on the game control board to control the progress of the game,
It is further provided with an effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) provided on the effect control board and controlling the execution of the effect based on a command transmitted from the game control means.
The game control means executes variable display of identification information (for example, fluctuates a special figure).
The effect control means executes variable display of the effect identification information in response to the variable display of the identification information (for example, fluctuates the decorative pattern).
The game control means controls the variable display of the identification information to the interrupted state (for example, executing the process of 80AKS005) while controlling the setting confirmation state.
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 or means 2 according to the feature unit 80AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the control of the game control means from becoming complicated during the setting confirmation state.

As a gaming machine of means 4 according to the feature unit 80AK,
Based on the end of the control to the setting confirmation state, the game control means ends the control of the interrupted state and resumes the variable display of the identification information (for example, executing the process of 80AKS009).
It may be a gaming machine of means 3 according to the feature unit 80AK.
In such a configuration, the variable display control can be restarted after the setting is confirmed.

As a gaming machine of means 5 according to the feature unit 80AK,
The effect control means limits the execution of the effect (for example, 80AKS012) based on receiving a command indicating control to the setting confirmation state as a command transmitted from the game control means during the variable display. The variable display that was being executed when limiting the execution of the effect is until the end, based on the reception of the command indicating that the control to the setting confirmation state has been completed. Perform specific notification for a period (for example, execute the process of 80AKS014),
It may be a gaming machine of means 4 according to the feature unit 80AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the processing by the effect control means from becoming complicated.

As a gaming machine of means 6 related to the feature unit 80AK,
Based on the fact that the change permission state is controlled by the setting state control means, a state output means (for example, a setting change) capable of outputting a changing signal indicating the change permission state to the outside of the gaming machine It also has an external terminal board that outputs a signal indicating that it has been done).
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 5 according to the feature unit 80AK.
In such a configuration, security can be improved by outputting a changing signal to the outside.

(Explanation of feature 81AK)
FIG. 20-36 shows the effect control main executed by the feature unit 81AK that can execute an error notification as a specific notification when an operation for changing the setting is performed during the game (during the game). It is a flowchart which shows an example of processing. In the feature unit 81AK, after the power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lock switch 51 is operated to turn on, so that the set value is changed during the game (transition to the setting change state is performed). It is possible to determine that) and notify the error. That is, unlike the feature unit 80AK, the feature unit 81AK does not perform the setting confirmation process (in progress setting confirmation process) even when the lock switch 51 is turned on after the power is supplied, and the setting confirmation state is entered. Does not migrate. Further, the command 9400H, which is a setting confirmation start command, is not transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and instead, a command (lock) indicating that the lock switch 51 is turned on during the game. A new command 9700H is transmitted as a switch-on command). Instead of the new command 9700H, a command indicating that the lock switch 51 has been turned on during the game may be transmitted, for example, as a part of the error designation command in the command 96XXH. In the effect control main process shown in FIGS. 20-36, unlike the effect control main process shown in FIGS. 20-28, the effect random number update process is executed in step AKS017, and then the specific notification process (step 81AKS01A) is executed. Then, the process returns to step AKS013. The other processes in the effect control main process shown in FIGS. 20-36 are the same as those in the effect control main process shown in FIGS. 20-28.

FIG. 20-37 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 81AKS01A of FIG. 20-36 as the specific notification process. In the specific notification process shown in FIGS. 20-37, the effect control CPU 120 determines, for example, whether or not the specific notification is in progress (step 81AKS001). In the process of step 81AKS001, it is determined whether or not the specific notification is performed by executing the process of step 81AKS012 or step 81AKS013 described later. When the specific notification is not in progress (step 81AKS001; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a command indicating that the game is in progress (a command in the game) has been received from the main board 11 side (step). 81AKS002). In the process of step 81AKS002, as commands indicating that the game is in progress, for example, a variation pattern specification command, a variation display result notification command, a variation display result notification command, a large winning opening opening notification command, a hold storage number notification command, and the like. It may be determined whether or not a command other than the customer waiting demo specification command, such as a background specification command for specifying the game state, has been received.

When the command during the game is received in step 81AKS002 (step 81AKS002; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is set (step 81AKS003). The customer waiting flag is a flag that is set to the ON state when a customer waiting demo designation command described later is received, and is a flag indicating that the customer is waiting, that is, the game is not in progress. When the customer waiting flag is on (step 81AKS003; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the customer waiting flag to the off state (81AKS004). After executing the process of step 81AKS004, or when the customer waiting flag is off in step 81AKS003 (step 81AKS003; No), the effect control CPU 120 is in the game (the game is in progress). The in-game flag, which is a flag indicating the above, is set to the ON state (step 81AKS005).

After executing the process of step 81AKS005, or when it is determined in step 81AKS002 that the command being played has not been received (step 81AKS002; No), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the customer waiting demo designation command. (Step 81AKS006). The customer waiting demo designation command is used when the power is turned on when there is no hold memory (after clearing the RAM), and at a predetermined timing after the hold memory does not exist and the fluctuation stops in the state where the normal game is being performed. It is a command transmitted from the side of the main board 11 and indicates that the game is not in progress. If it is determined that the customer waiting demo designation command has been received (step 81AKS006; Yes), it is determined whether or not the in-game flag is set to the on state (step 81AKS007), and if it is on (step 81AKS007). Yes), the in-game flag is cleared to the off state (step AKS008). After executing the process of step AKS008, or when it is determined in step 81AKS007 that the in-game flag is in the off state (step 81AKS007; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets the customer waiting flag to the on state (step 81AKS007). 81AKS009). After executing the process of step 81AKS009, or when it is determined in step 81AKS006 that the customer waiting demo designation command has not been received (step 81AKS006; No), the effect control CPU 120 uses the lock switch-on command command 9700H. Is determined (step 81AKS010). When the lock switch-on command has not been received (step 81AKS010; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the specific notification process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lock switch-on command has been received (step 81AKS010; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the in-game flag is set to the ON state (step 81AKS011). When the in-game flag is set to the ON state (step 81AKS011; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines that an illegality has been performed, performs an error notification as a specific notification (step 81AKS012), and ends the specific notification process. do. The error notification in step 81AKS012 indicates, for example, that the fraud has been performed on the effect display device 5, and also notifies that the fraud has been performed by various lamps. Further, the speakers 8L and 8R may output a voice indicating that the fraud has been performed.

On the other hand, when the in-game flag is set to the off state (step 81AKS011; No), the effect control CPU 120 turns on the power again as a specific notification based on the customer waiting flag being in the on state. Notification of what should be done (power re-on notification) is performed (step 81AKS013), and the specific notification process is terminated. In the process of step 81AKS013, a display indicating that the power should be turned on again is displayed on the effect display device 5, and a voice indicating that the power should be turned on again is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The specific notification performed in the processes of step 81AKS012 and step 81AKS013 is continuously performed until the process of step AKS060 described later is executed.

When it is determined in step 81AKS001 that the specific notification is being performed (step 81AKS001; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a power cutoff command has been received from the main board 11 side (step 81AKS014). The power-off command is a command transmitted to the effect control board 12 when the power-off signal is taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. If the power off command has not been received (step 81AKS014; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the specific notification process as it is. On the other hand, when a power off command is received (step 81AKS014; Yes), control is performed to end specific notification such as error notification performed in step 81AKS012 and power re-on notification performed in step AKS013 (various notification end control). The specific notification process is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the premise that the feature unit 81AK shifts to the setting change state based on the fact that the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 are each operated to the on state at the start of power supply. , A command indicating that the lock switch 51 has been turned on (lock switch on command) is received after receiving a command indicating that the game is in progress (during the game), such as a hold storage number notification command. It is determined that the lock switch 51 has been turned on during the progress of the game after the power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and specific notification is performed (step 81AKS012). According to this, security can be improved. The command indicating that the game is in progress may be a command other than the customer waiting demo specification command, such as a hold storage number notification command, a fluctuation pattern specification command, or a background specification command, and after receiving such a command. Based on the reception of the setting confirmation start command, it is determined that the fraud has been performed, and a notification to that effect is given.

Further, when the feature unit 81AK receives the setting confirmation start command while receiving the customer waiting demo designation command, it notifies that the power should be turned on again (power re-turning notification) as a specific notification. According to this, security can be improved. In addition, once the specific notification is performed, the specific notification is continuously performed until the power supply is terminated. According to this, security can be improved.

(Explanation of a modified example of the feature 81AK)
In the above embodiment, an example in which the error notification is performed in step 81AKS012 of FIGS. 20-37 is shown, but in addition to this, the notification that the power should be turned on again may be performed in the same manner as in step 81AKS13.

Further, in the above embodiment, it is determined that the specific notification such as the error notification performed in step 81AKS012 in FIGS. 20-37 and the power re-on notification performed in step AKS013 has received the power off command in step 81AKS014. For example, when an error notification is performed in step 81AKS012, the lock switch 51 is turned on during the game (an operation for changing the setting is performed). That) may be stored, and when the power is turned on again, it may be notified that the lock switch 51 has been turned on during the game before the turn-on. Specifically, the backup area of the RAM 122 stores that the lock switch 51 was turned on during the game, and when the power is turned on again, the backup area is confirmed and displayed on the effect display device 5. It may be notified by displaying or outputting voice. According to this, security can be improved.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 81AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned feature portion 81AK, as a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the technique described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 is still insufficient in terms of security. Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 81AK for providing a gaming machine capable of improving security,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value, and
With a hold storage means that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage information (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 151A, the second special figure hold storage unit 151B, etc.),
A setting state control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) that can control the change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means is provided.
The setting state control means controls the change permission state (for example, CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa12) when a specific operation is performed on the operation unit and power is supplied before the start of power supply.
A specific notification means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that performs the processing of step 81AKS012) that performs specific notification when the specific operation is performed on the operation unit while the hold storage information after power supply is stored is used.
It may be a gaming machine characterized by further being provided.
With such a configuration, security can be improved.

As a gaming machine of means 2 according to the feature portion 81AK,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) provided on the game control board to control the progress of the game,
It is further provided with an effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) provided on the effect control board and controlling the execution of the effect based on a command transmitted from the game control means.
The effect control means includes the specific notification means.
After receiving the command transmitted while the game is in progress, the specific notification means notifies that the fraud has been performed based on the reception of the command indicating that the specific operation has been performed (for example,). If Yes is determined in step 81AKS011, the process of step 81AKS012 is executed, etc.),
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 81AK.
In such a configuration, security can be improved.

As a gaming machine of means 3 according to the feature portion 81AK,
The specific notification means is based on receiving a command indicating that the specific operation has been performed after receiving a customer waiting command transmitted when the hold storage information is not stored in the hold storage means. , Notifies that power will be supplied again,
It may be a gaming machine of means 2 according to the feature unit 81AK.
In such a configuration, security can be improved.

As a gaming machine of means 4 according to the feature portion 81AK,
Once the specific notification is performed, the specific notification means continuously performs the specific notification until the power supply ends (the specific notification performed in step 81AKS012 or 81AKS013 is processed by step 81AKS015. It will continue until it is done, etc.),
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 3 according to the feature unit 81AK.
In such a configuration, security can be improved.

As a gaming machine of means 5 according to the feature portion 81AK,
An operation storage means (such as a backup area of the RAM 122) for storing the specific operation performed on the operation unit while the hold storage information after power supply is stored is further provided.
When the power supply is performed again, the specific notification means notifies that the specific operation has been performed before the power supply (for example, the lock switch 51 is turned on during the game before the power supply is turned on again). To that effect, etc.),
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 4 according to the feature unit 81AK.
In such a configuration, security can be improved.

(Explanation of feature 83AK)
Subsequently, the feature unit 83AK will be described. In the feature unit 83AK, as an error notification process in the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error (abnormality) occurs on the effect control board 12 side based on the error designation command (command 96XXH described above) transmitted from the main board 11 side. On the side of the effect control board 12, it is possible to independently determine the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and notify the error (abnormality) regardless of the error designation command. Then, while the setting is being changed, the error notification based on the error designation command is restricted, and the error determination and the error notification independently performed by the effect control board 12 regardless of the error designation command can be executed. In such a feature unit 83AK, the operation of the movable member driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 (more specifically, the short initial operation and the long initial operation described later) is mainly produced regardless of the error designation command. The error determination and error notification independently performed on the control board 12 side will be described below. Regarding the error notification based on the error specification command, it is specified which type of error (abnormality) has occurred based on the error specification command transmitted from the main board 11 side, and the specified error (abnormality) is detected. The occurrence may be notified by error notification processing.

FIG. 20-38 shows an execution example of the power-on operation by the movable member driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The movable member driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 includes a first movable member serving as a first movable effect device and a second movable member serving as a second movable effect device. The first movable member stops at the lower left position of the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retracted position). An operation effect of ascending diagonally upward to the right from the evacuation position, stopping at an advance position overlapping the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and then returning to the evacuation position is performed. The first movable member includes a rotation mechanism, first to third split pieces, and a slide mechanism. The first to third split pieces are provided at the tip of the rotating mechanism. The first to third split pieces form a predetermined figure at the origin position when they are united in the closed state. The rotation mechanism of the first movable member is rotated by the operation motor AK011 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position in the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5. As a result, after the first movable member advances to the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5, the first to third split pieces are split by the operation motor AK012. On the other hand, when the first movable member is in the origin position, the first to third split pieces cannot be opened. The slide mechanism of the first movable member is slid laterally by the operation motor AK013 after the rotation mechanism of the first movable member and the first to third split pieces are rotated to the advanced positions. The slide mechanism of the first movable member has the rotation mechanism and the first to third split pieces on the left side of the effect display device 5 with the origin position when the first movable member is in the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5. It suffices if it can be slid between the position and the right side position.

The second movable member stops with the position above the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retracted position). After descending from the retracted position and stopping at an advance position overlapping on the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, an operation effect of returning to the retracted position is performed. The second movable member is lowered by the operation motor AK014 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position slightly above the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and is raised from the advanced position to the retracted position. In this way, the second movable member performs an effect operation of simply reciprocating up and down by the driving force of the operation motor AK014.

The origin position of the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK021. The origin position of the first to third split pieces of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK022. The origin position of the slide mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK023. The origin position of the second movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK024. The operation motor AK011 provides a driving force that makes the rotation mechanism of the first movable member movable between the origin position and the advance position. The operating motor AK012 provides a driving force that makes the first to third split pieces of the first movable member movable between the closed state and the open state at the origin position. The operation motor AK013 provides a driving force that makes the slide mechanism of the first movable member movable between the origin position and the left side position or the right side position of the effect display device 5. The operating motor AK014 provides a driving force that makes the second movable member movable between the origin position and the advance position.

The power-on operation by the first movable member and the second movable member includes a long initial operation and a short initial operation. The long initial motion is an initial motion that performs the same motion as the normal effect motion during the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game. By executing the long initial operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not a problem occurs in the normal production operation. The short initial operation is an operation in which some operations in the normal effect operation are omitted, and is a return operation for returning the first movable member and the second movable member to the origin position.

When the long initial operation is executed as the power-on operation, first, as shown by the solid line arrow 72AKM01, the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is moved to the origin position (retract position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. It is moved to an overlapping position on the front side of the center of the display screen in the effect display device 5 which is the advance position. Subsequently, as shown by the broken line arrow 72AKM02, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the closed state to the open state at the origin position by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. After that, as shown by the broken line arrow 72AKM03, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the open state to the closed state (origin position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. Next, as shown by the solid line arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06, the slide mechanism of the first movable member is moved from the origin position to the movable position in the right direction by the driving force of the operation motor AK013, and then moved to the movable position in the left direction. After that, return to the origin position. Then, as shown by the solid line arrow 72AKM07, the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is returned from the advance position to the origin position (retract position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. After that, as shown by the broken line arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09, the second movable member is moved from the origin position (retract position) to the advance position by the driving force of the operation motor AK014, and then returned to the origin position (retract position).

In the short initial operation, at least a part of the operation may be omitted or added depending on the detection result by the origin sensors AK021 to AK024. For example, when the origin sensor AK022 is off and the other origin sensors are on, the broken line arrow 72AKM03 is used as an operation to move the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to the closed state which is the origin position. The operation motor AK012 is driven so as to move in the direction. Then, when the origin sensor AK022 is turned on, the drive of the operation motor AK012 may be stopped. After that, by moving the rotation mechanism of the first movable member so as to be smaller than the movement amount indicated by the solid line arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07, the origin sensor AK021 is once turned off and then turned on. Drive the motor AK021. Further, the second movable member may be moved as indicated by the broken line arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09 to drive the operation motor AK024 so that the origin sensor AK024 is once turned off and then turned on.

FIG. 20-39 shows a control pattern used to drive a movable member by the operating motors AK011 to AK014. The pattern data constituting these control patterns may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12. In this embodiment, a short initial control pattern 72AKP01 and a long initial control pattern 72AKP02 are prepared in advance as control patterns for the movable member.

The short initial control pattern 72AKP01 is a control pattern used to execute the short initial operation. The long initial control pattern AKP02 is a control pattern used to execute the long initial operation. As the control pattern of the movable member, more control patterns may be prepared. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the drive contents of the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the pattern data read from the ROM 121, and control the operation of the movable member.

FIG. 20-40 is a flowchart showing an example of a power-on command process executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the feature unit 83AK of this embodiment. It suffices that this power-on command process can be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 83AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the received command from the main board 11 in the same manner as in the above embodiment (steps 72AKS001 to 72AKS004). When the reception command is determined to be the setting change start command in step 72AKS003 (step 72AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step 72AKS005) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and the setting is changed. Control to start the notification (step 72AKS006).

After the control in step 72AKS006 is performed, unlike the above embodiment, the control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS007). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the short initial control pattern 72AKP01 from the predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS007, it is possible to perform the control to execute the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting is changed as the change permission state. Even in the period after proceeding to step 72AKS008 or later, the control in step 72AKS007 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

After executing the process of step 72AKS007, an error determination process is executed unlike the above embodiment (step 83AKS001). Details of the error determination process will be described later. The error determination process may be executed after the short initial operation period has expired. Following the control by step 83AKS001, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change in the same manner as in the above embodiment (step 72AKS008). If the setting change is not completed (step 72AKS008; No), the process returns to the process of 83AKS001, and the error determination process is performed for a period until the setting change is completed. When it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is completed (step 72AKS008; Yes), the setting change notification is controlled to end (step 72AKS009), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS010).

After the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010, unlike the above embodiment, control is performed to execute the long initial operation (step 72AKS011). Subsequently, the error determination process is executed (step 83AKS003), and the process proceeds to step 72AKS014. In step 72AKS011, for example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the long initial control pattern 72AKP02 from the predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS011, it is possible to perform the control to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation of the movable member after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS011, the long initial operation which is the initial operation is executed after the short initial operation which is the return operation when the setting is changed as the change permission state. It is possible to prevent control. Even after proceeding to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS011 may be continuously executed until the end of the long initial operation period, and the control to execute the long initial operation may be performed.

When the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 (step 72AKS001; Yes), control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 72AKS012), and then control to execute the long initial operation. (Step 72AKS013). In step 72AKS013, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation controlled by the control in step 72AKS012 is completed. By executing the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, the short initial operation which is the return operation is followed by the long initial which is the initial operation. You can control the execution of operations. Even after proceeding to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS013 may be continuously executed until the end of the long initial operation period, and the control to execute the long initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by a common process using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

After the long initial operation is executed in step 72AKS011 or step 72AKS013, the effect control CPU 120 performs error determination processing (step 83AKS003) and controls to execute initialization notification (step 72AKS014). The error determination process of step 83AKS003 may be executed after the long initial operation period ends. It should be noted that the control for executing the initialization notification may be performed, and then the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed. When the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001, the control to execute the initialization notification may be performed before the control to execute the short initial operation is performed by step 72AKS012. .. In that case, the error notification process may be executed after the short initial operation and the long initial operation are performed. After executing the process of step 72AKS014, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command process at power-on.

If the reception command is determined to be the setting confirmation start command in step 72AKS004 (step 72AKS004; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step 72AKS015) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and the setting confirmation is performed. Control to start the notification (step 72AKS016). Subsequently, unlike the above embodiment, control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 72AKS017). By executing the control in step 72AKS017, when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the control for executing the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is executed. It can be performed. Even in the period after proceeding to step 72AKS018 or later, the control in step 72AKS017 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

After the control to execute the short initial operation is performed in step 72AKS017, the effect control CPU 120 performs error determination processing (step 83AKS002). This error determination process may be performed after the short initial operation period has expired. Following the control by step 83AKS002, it is determined whether or not to end the setting confirmation in the same manner as in the above embodiment (step 72AKS018). If the setting confirmation is not completed (step 72AKS018; No), the process returns to the process of 83AKS002, and the error determination process is performed for a period until the setting confirmation is completed. When it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is completed (step 72AKS018; Yes), the setting confirmation notification is controlled to end (step 72AKS019), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS020).

After the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS021), and the power-on command processing is ended. By executing the control in step 72AKS021, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed, the long initial operation which is the initial operation of the movable member is executed. Control can be performed. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS021, when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value is in the setting confirmation state, the long initial operation which is the initial operation is followed by the short initial operation which is the return operation. Can be prevented from controlling to execute. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 72AKS021 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period is completed, and the long initial operation may be executed.

When it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the reception command is a power failure recovery designation command (step 72AKS002; Yes), control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 72AKS022), and then control to execute the long initial operation. (Step 72AKS023), the command processing at power-on is terminated. In step 72AKS023, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation controlled by the control in step 72AKS022 is completed. By executing the control in steps 72AKS022 and 72AKS023, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, the short initial operation which is the return operation is followed by the long initial which is the initial operation. You can control the execution of operations. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 72AKS023 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and the long initial operation may be executed. The control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by a common process using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

After the long initial operation is executed in step 72AKS021 or step 72AKS023, the effect control CPU 120 performs an error determination process (step 83AKS004) and ends the power-on command process. The error determination process of step 83AKS004 may be executed after the long initial operation period ends.

FIG. 20-41 is a flowchart showing an example of the error determination process performed in steps 83AKS001 to 83AKS004 of FIG. 20-40. In the error determination process shown in FIGS. 20-41, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not an error has occurred (step 83AKS005). In the process of step 83AKS005, for example, it is determined that the short initial operation or the long initial operation is normally performed according to the detection result by the origin sensors AK021 to AK024, and an error occurs when the short initial operation or the long initial operation is not normally performed. It may be determined that it has been done. When it is determined that no error has occurred (step 83AKS005; No), the error determination process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that an error has occurred (step 83AKS005; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting change is completed (step 83AKS006). In step 83AKS006, for example, it may be determined whether or not the setting change has been completed by confirming whether or not the setting change end command (command 93XXH) that specifies the end of the setting change state has been received. When the setting change is not completed, that is, when the setting change end command is not received (step 83AKS006; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting is being changed (step 83AKS007). In step 83AKS007, for example, it may be determined whether or not the setting is being changed by confirming whether or not the setting change start command (command 9100H) that specifies the start of the setting change state has been received.

When it is determined that the setting is being changed, that is, when the setting change start command has been received (step 83AKS007; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the error has been resolved (step 83AKS008). In step 83AKS008, for example, it may be determined whether or not the error has been resolved according to the detection result by the origin sensors AK021 to AK024. If the error is not resolved, that is, if it is not detected by the origin sensor to be detected (step 83AKS008; No), the effect control CPU 120 is in a special mode based on the fact that an error has occurred during the setting change. The abnormality is notified (step 83AKS009), and the process returns to step 83AKS006. In step 83AKS009, for example, an error occurrence is displayed on the effect display device 5 in a color (for example, red) or a font (for example, Mincho style) different from the normal time, or a special sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The abnormality may be notified in a mode different from the normal mode (the mode in step 83AKS012 described later).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step 83AKS008 that the error has been resolved, that is, when it is detected by the origin sensor to be detected (step 83AKS008; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 has a special aspect performed in step 83AKS009. The abnormality notification end control for ending the abnormality notification of the above is performed (step 83AKS010), and the process returns to the process of step 83AKS006.

When it is determined in step 83AKS006 that the setting change is completed, that is, when the setting change end command is received (step 83AKS006; Yes), it is determined in the same manner as in step 83AKS008 whether or not the error has been resolved (step 83AKS011). .. When it is determined that the error has not been resolved (step 83AKS011), or when it is determined that the setting has not been changed in step 83AKS007, that is, when the setting has not been changed (83AKS007; No), the effect control CPU 120 Performs an abnormality notification in a normal manner (step 83AKS012), and returns to step 83AKS011. In step 83AKS012, for example, an error occurrence is displayed on the effect display device 5 with a normal color (for example, blue) or a font (for example, Gothic font), or a warning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. You can notify the abnormality with. If the special notification in the normal mode is performed after the abnormality notification in the special mode is performed in step 83AKS009, the abnormality notification in the special mode is switched to the abnormality notification in the normal mode. When it is determined in step 83AKS011 that the error has been resolved (step 83AKS011; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the abnormality notification end control for ending the abnormality notification in the normal mode performed in step 83AKS012 (step 83AKS013). End the error judgment process.

As described above, in the feature unit 83AK, as an error notification process in the pachinko game machine 1, an error is generated on the effect control board 12 side based on the error designation command (command 96XXH described above) transmitted from the main board 11 side. In addition to notifying the occurrence of (abnormality), by executing the error determination processing in steps 83AKS001 to 83AKS004 on the side of the effect control board 12, an error (abnormality) can be independently generated regardless of the error specification command. It is possible to determine the occurrence and notify it. Then, during the setting change, the game is stopped on the side of the main board 11, so that the error notification based on the error designation command is not performed (the error designation command is not transmitted). On the other hand, on the side of the effect control board 12, error determination processing is performed in steps 83AKS001 to 83AKS004, and error determination and error notification can be executed. Therefore, the safety of the gaming machine can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 83AK, since the error determination process is executed by the command process when the power is turned on, the error determination process performed on the effect control board 12 side is performed regardless of whether or not the setting is being changed. , It is feasible from the start of power supply. Therefore, the safety of the gaming machine can be improved by extending the monitoring period. Further, the feature unit 83AK performs the abnormality notification performed during the setting change in a special mode different from the normal mode (step 83AKS009). Therefore, the abnormality notification can be preferably performed. Then, if the error is not resolved even after the setting change is completed, the abnormality notification in the special mode is changed to the abnormality notification in the normal mode. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly switch to the normal mode after the setting change is completed.

(Explanation of a modified example of the feature portion 83AK)
In the above embodiment, in the error determination process, an example is shown in which it is determined and notified whether or not the operation of the movable member driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 is normally performed, but this is an example. .. For example, in addition to the operation of the movable member, the abnormality of the speakers 8L and 8R may be determined and notified, or the abnormality of the game effect lamp 9 may be determined and notified. Further, not only the operation of the movable member but also, for example, an abnormality of the operation motors AK011 to AK014 for driving the movable member, an abnormality of the vibration motor, or the like may be determined and notified. Furthermore, when multiple abnormalities are determined and notified in this way, abnormalities related to various motors may cause a fire, so they are displayed with priority over the setting change screen. High abnormalities may be displayed with priority over the setting change screen. On the contrary, the notification may not be performed for an abnormality of low importance. According to this, the safety of the gaming machine can be further improved. Specifically, abnormalities with high importance and abnormalities with low importance may be defined and stored in advance, and when a target abnormality occurs, each process may be performed.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the error determination process can be executed on the effect control board 12 side during the setting change is shown, but in addition to this, the effect control board 12 side is also displayed during the setting confirmation. It may be possible to execute the error determination process. In addition to this, for example, even when the movable member is operated as an effect during the game, the error determination process may be performed on the effect control board 12 side without using the error designation command. It should be noted that it is possible to constantly monitor whether or not an error has occurred while changing the setting or checking the setting, or it may be possible to monitor whether or not an error has occurred at regular intervals such as every 10 seconds. ..

(Explanation of means related to feature 83AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned feature unit 83AK, as a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine that does not notify the abnormality even if an abnormality occurs during the period of setting confirmation and notifies the abnormality at a predetermined timing after the completion of the setting confirmation, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-54911. Some are listed. However, in the techniques described in JP-A-2010-201002 and JP-A-2016-54911, error processing during setting change cannot be performed as usual, which may reduce the safety of the gaming machine. .. Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 83AK for providing a gaming machine capable of improving the safety of the gaming machine.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value, and
A setting state control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) that can control the change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means, and
It is provided with an effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that controls the execution of the effect based on a command transmitted from the game control means.
The effect control means includes a first notification means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes an error notification process based on the command 96XXH) that notifies an abnormality based on an abnormality command transmitted from the game control means, and the abnormality. The effect control means side includes a second notification means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of steps 83AKS001 to 83AKS004) that determines the presence or absence of an abnormal state and notifies the abnormality regardless of a command.
While the change permission state is being controlled, the abnormality notification by the first notification means is restricted (for example, the error notification based on the error designation command is not performed), while the abnormality notification by the second notification means can be executed. Yes (for example, the process of steps 83AKS001 to 83AKS004 can be executed).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, the safety of the gaming machine can be improved.

As a gaming machine of means 2 according to the feature unit 83AK,
The second notification means can execute the abnormality notification from the start of power supply regardless of whether or not the change permission state is being controlled (for example, an error determination process is executed in step AKS012). ,
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 83AK.
In such a configuration, the safety of the gaming machine can be improved by extending the monitoring period.

As a gaming machine of means 3 according to the feature unit 83AK,
The second notification means can execute the abnormality notification during control to the change permission state in a special mode different from the normal mode (for example, executing the process of step 83AKS009).
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 or means 2 according to the feature unit 83AK.
In such a configuration, abnormality notification can be preferably performed.

As a gaming machine of means 4 according to the feature unit 83AK,
If the second notification means continues to be in the abnormal state when the control to the change permission state is completed, the second notification means changes the abnormality notification in the special mode to the normal mode (for example, the process of step 83 AKS012). Execute, etc.),
It may be a gaming machine of means 3 according to the feature unit 83AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to smoothly switch to the normal mode after the setting change is completed.

As a gaming machine of means 5 according to the feature unit 83AK,
When the second notification means determines the occurrence of a specific type of abnormal state while controlling the change permission state, the second notification means is controlling the abnormality notification corresponding to the specific type of abnormality state to the change permission state. Priority is given to notification (for example, abnormalities related to various motors are displayed with priority over the setting change screen).
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 4 according to the feature unit 83AK.
In such a configuration, the safety of the gaming machine can be further improved.

(Explanation of means common to feature 80AK, feature 81AK and feature 83AK)
As a gaming machine of means A related to the feature unit 80AK, the feature unit 81AK, and the feature unit 83AK.
A setting detection means (for example, a lock switch 51) that can detect an operation related to the setting, and
Initialization detection means (for example, clear switch AK001) that can detect the operation related to the initialization of the gaming machine, and
A setting confirmation control means that can control the setting confirmation state based on the detection of an operation by the setting detection means with the start of power supply (for example, CPU 103 that executes steps AKS001 and AKS002).
A change permission control means that can control the change permission state based on the detection of an operation by the initialization detection means with the start of power supply (for example, CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa13) is provided.
It may be a gaming machine according to the feature unit 80AK, the feature unit 81AK, and the feature unit 83AK.
In such a configuration, the setting confirmation state and the change permission state can be appropriately controlled, and the setting value can be set appropriately.

As a gaming machine of means B related to the feature unit 80AK, the feature unit 81AK, and the feature unit 83AK.
A setting detection means (for example, a lock switch 51) that can detect an operation related to the setting, and
Initialization detection means (for example, clear switch AK001) that can detect operations related to initialization,
When the operation is not detected by the setting detection means and the operation is detected by the initialization detection means with the start of the power supply, the initialization notification is executed at the same time as the start of the power supply, while the power supply is started. For effect control that executes the initialization notification means (for example, the command processing at power-on in step AKS012) that executes the initialization notification after the operation is no longer detected when the operation is detected by the setting detection means. CPU120, etc.)
It may be a gaming machine according to the feature unit 80AK, the feature unit 81AK, and the feature unit 83AK.
In such a configuration, the initialization notification is appropriately executed, and the set value can be appropriately set.

As a gaming machine of means C related to the feature unit 80AK, the feature unit 81AK, and the feature unit 83AK.
It is provided with an information display means (for example, a display monitor 29) capable of displaying information on the game value given based on the game medium entering a predetermined area.
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, display by the first display unit 29A).
It may be a gaming machine according to the feature unit 80AK, the feature unit 81AK, and the feature unit 83AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately set the set value without separately providing a configuration for displaying the set value.

As a gaming machine of means D related to the feature unit 80AK, the feature unit 81AK, and the feature unit 83AK.
An effect detection means (for example, output amount changeover switch 71AK001) capable of detecting an operation related to the output amount of the effect, and
The display control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes step AKS026) is provided to display the display related to the set value by the setting means with priority over the display related to the output amount of the effect.
It may be a gaming machine according to the feature unit 80AK, the feature unit 81AK, and the feature unit 83AK.
In such a configuration, the display related to the set value is appropriately displayed, and it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means E related to the feature unit 80AK, the feature unit 81AK, and the feature unit 83AK.
The effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the command analysis process of AKS015) that controls the execution of the effect based on the information from the game control means, and the effect control means.
The effect control means is an information limiting means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes AKS027) that restricts control based on information different from the notification information for notifying the end of the change permission state when the change permission state is in effect. ) And
It may be a gaming machine according to the feature unit 80AK, the feature unit 81AK, and the feature unit 83AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem and appropriately set the set value.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion 80AK, the feature portion 81AK, and the feature portion 83AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the respective configurations relating to the other feature portions. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions. For example, with respect to the feature unit 80AK, when the lock switch 51 is turned on during the fluctuation, the state shifts to the setting confirmation state, but during the setting confirmation state, the effect control board 12 side like the feature unit 83AK. , Steps 83AKS001 to 83AKS004 may be executed, and the occurrence of an error (abnormality) may be independently determined and notified regardless of the error specification command. Further, regarding the feature unit 81AK, when the lock switch 51 is turned on during the game after the power is supplied, a specific notification is given, and the feature unit 83AK is placed on the side of the effect control board 12 like the feature unit 83AK. Therefore, the error determination processing of steps 83AKS001 to 83AKS004 may be executed, and the occurrence of an error (abnormality) may be independently determined and notified regardless of the error specification command.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 51 ... Lock switch 100 ... Game control microcomputer 120 ... Production control CPU
AK001 ... Clear switch 72AKP01 ... Short initial control pattern 72AKP02 ... Long initial control pattern

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information,
And setting means capable of setting a set value,
And game control means capable of controlling the pre-Symbol advantageous state in accordance with a set value,
Based on the second operation different from the first operation and the first operation relates to initializing the gaming machine when the power supply is started is detected, the setting permission state for permitting setting of the set value is controllable, power supply based on the fact that the said first operation is not detected the second operation when initiated was detected, control the setting confirmation state to verify the set value and set Josei your means possible,
Initialization notification means that performs initialization notification based on the initialization of the gaming machine, and
A permission notification means capable of executing a setting permission notification for notifying that the setting permission state is in the setting permission state, and a permission notification means.
A confirmation notification means capable of executing a setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation state is in the setting confirmation state, and a confirmation notification means.
It is provided with an abnormality notification means capable of executing an abnormality notification based on the occurrence of an abnormality related to a magnet.
While the information including the hold information is initialized corresponding to the setting permission state, the information including the hold information is not initialized corresponding to the setting confirmation state .
The initialization notification means
If the first operation is detected and the second operation is not detected when the power supply is started, the initialization notification is executed.
When controlled to the setting permission state, the initialization notification is executed at a timing different from the start timing of the power supply, and the initialization notification is executed.
When an abnormality related to the magnet occurs during the execution of the setting permission notification or the setting confirmation notification, the setting permission notification or the setting confirmation notification is prioritized over the abnormality notification.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images